T 25 GM 15.16320.001 (1-2) Ing

INSTRUCTION - USE - ASSEMBLY
MAINTENANCE AND SPARE PART HANDBOOK
BURNER SERIES: T...G ../.. (GAS)

TECFLAM S.r.l congratulates you on having chosen this machine and puts its techni-
cal service at your disposal in order to solve any problems regarding the use and
maintenance of this and all the machines it manufactures.
For any problem or query, please contact us directly:
TECFLAM S.r.l.
Via Curiel, 3 Corte Tegge 42025 Cavriago (RE) Italy
TEL. +39 0522/944207 FAX +39 0522/494091
tecflam@tecflam.it
www.tecflam.it
Before starting to assemble and start up the machine, or perform maintenance or re-
pairs, read this manual carefully.
It must be used in order to get to grips with the basic concepts which allow the ma-
chine in question to be used correctly and can be used as a reference for maintenance
and for repairing any faults, as it contains information, advice and warnings which are
useful in order to use and store the machine in the right way.
TECFLAM burners, the result of years of experience in the maintenance sector, are
state-of-the-art, high-performance technological products, designed in compliance with
applicable standards and manufactured to have a high level of reliability.
TECFLAM S.r.l. reminds its customers that simple maintenance carried out periodi-
cally by expert operators ensures that the machine performance levels remain un-
changed over time.
2
APPROXIMATE DIMENSIONS
Model Holes
mm
T10; T25 14
T40; T60; T80; T120; T150; T200 18
Model A B C D E F G H I L M N
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
T 10 521 168 290 260 420 170 230 162 222 185 230 404
TR 25 608 219 380 330 545 221 281 221 281 235 300 463.5
T25 608 219 380 330 545 221 281 221 281 235 300 463.5
TR40 702 250 492 440 712 302 362 246 306 265 400 540.5
T40 702 300 492 440 712 302 362 246 306 315 400 540.5
TR60 805 300 500 490 745 362 422 276 336 315 450 618
T60 805 360 500 490 745 362 422 276 336 375 450 618
TR80 904 360 600 600 900 432 512 354 434 375 540 668
T80 904 430 600 600 900 432 512 354 434 445 540 668
TR120 1050 430 630 660 960 500 583 404 487 445 620 769
T120 1050 500 650 660 980 500 583 404 487 515 620 769
TR150 1250 500 700 730 1065 573 653 502 582 515 690 936
T150 1250 570 700 730 1065 573 653 502 582 590 690 936
TR200 1500 570 750 820 1160 650 750 570 670 590 780 1116
T200 1500 650 750 820 1160 650 750 570 670 670 780 1116
TECFLAM S.r.l. reserves the right to change the technical data without prior notice.
3
SUMMARY
APPROXIMATE DIMENSIONS 3
GENERAL WARNINGS 5
A. DOCUMENTATION
B. RECEIPT
C. STORAGE
D. INSTALLATION
E. STARTING-UP AND REGULATION
F. ACCIDENT PREVENTION
G. MAINTENANCE/CLEANING
H. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY
I. WARRANTY
J. CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 7
MAIN COMPONENTS OF SERIES BURNERS T 8
DUAL FUEL GAS/DIESEL OIL BURNER FUNCTIONAL CIRCUIT ERRORE. IL SEGNALIBRO
NON DEFINITO.
FLAME DIMENSIONS DIAGRAM 9
TRANSPORT AND INSTALLATION 12
A. HANDLING
B. MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 14
STARTING-UP 15
REGULATION 18
MODULATION
DEFLECTOR DISK / DIFFUSER
COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
IGNITION DEVICE
FLAME DETECTION
OIL PRESSURE REGULATION
REGULATING THE PILOT FLAME
NOZZLE
MAINTENANCE 25
SAFETY 26
C. GENERAL RULES
D. SAFETY RULES
E. RISK ANALYSIS
I) MOVING PARTS AND MECHANICAL RISKS
II) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGES
III) RISK OF BURNS
IV) DUST
V) EXPLOSIONS
VI) NOISE
TROUBLESHOOTING 28
4
GENERAL WARNINGS
A. Documentation
The instructions are intended for the persons responsible for using and supervising the
machine. This documentation constitutes an integral and essential part of the product
and must not be separated from it.
B. Receipt
Immediately after delivery of the machine, it is necessary to carry out a visual check. If
damage caused during transportation is found, it is necessary to proceed as set out in
the supply contract in order to obtain compensation.
C. Storage
If the machine or its components cannot be immediately positioned in the place of use,
they must be stored in their packaging, away from atmospheric agents or anything else
which could damage them in any way.
D. Installation
The machine or its components must only be installed by qualified personnel (authorised
by TECFLAM S.r.l) in compliance with all the instructions provided and must be shel-
tered from bad weather.
E. Starting-up and regulation
Only specialised personnel must start up and adjust the machine. Before starting up the
machine, it is essential for users to be fully aware of the warnings contained in the
documentation delivered alongside the machine and to observe all the applicable indica-
tions.
F. Accident prevention
The information given in this documentation regarding accident prevention must be ob-
served.
TECFLAM S.r.l works to manufacture its machines in compliance with applicable inter-
national safety standards. It is the customers responsibility to notify the manufacturer of
any particular safety-related requirements/accessories in the order phase. If the afore-
mentioned requirements result in further costs, these shall be at the customers ex-
pense.
G. Maintenance/Cleaning
Maintenance must only be carried out by qualified (*) personnel who are aware of what
is set out in this document.
In order to guarantee the efficiency of the machine, it is necessary to have TECFLAM
S.r.l personnel carry out periodic maintenance.
Cleaning must be performed according to the instructions given in the documentation
provided.
H. Intellectual property
TECFLAM S.r.l reserves all rights regarding this document and the machine described
herein. The customer acknowledges these rights and, in the absence of written authori-
5
sation, undertakes not to disclose the published contents and not to use the machine for
anything other than the purpose for which it was delivered.
I. Warranty
The validity of the warranty is set out in the contractual clauses. TECFLAM original
spare parts must be used. No claim can be made under the warranty for damage caused
by the use of unauthorised spare parts. Under no circumstances can the manufacturer
be held liable for damage resulting from inappropriate use, the non-observance of rules
and incorrect handling by unqualified personnel.
J. Change of ownership
If the machine is sold or transferred to third parties, this handbook must be delivered to-
gether with it.
TECFLAM S.r.l accepts no responsibility if the operations described below are not car-
ried out or in the event of negligence and/or tampering.
6
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
The TECFLAM T...G SERIES is capable of operating with gas These burners are "dual
block" type and electric fans, which are specially sized in compliance with the conditions
of use, can be installed on them.
This solution is particularly suitable for the burner to be used correctly with every type of
furnace, irrespective of the back-pressure in the chamber.
The special shape of the deflector disc of the TECFLAM burners guarantees a perfect
mixture of air and fuel, guaranteeing high combustion efficiency and cleaner smoke ex-
haust pipes of the generator/boiler.
Like all other TECFLAM burners, even the "T" series is equipped with components pro-
duced by leading European manufacturers that provide a high quality image to the
equipment and facilitate purchasing spare parts.
Operation
TECFLAM proposes a range of burners with power from 950.000 Kcal/h (1,104 kW) to
12 million Kcal/Ih (14,000 kW), all with MODULATING operation and a modulation ratio
of 1/5. Modulation allows you to adjust the flame depending on the requirements of the
system, limiting switching it on and off.
The structure of the burner body and the technology of the combustion head ensure:
- total accessibility to all internal and external organs

- maintaining the optimal combustion regulation
- less time for maintenance
- combustion yield > 92%
7
MAIN COMPONENTS OF SERIES BURNERS T
KEY
1. Burner Body
2. Blast tube (long/ short)
3. Blower
4. Flexible joint
5. Control panel
8. Servomotor
10. Gas regulation
13. UV Photocell
14. Inspection window
16. Electrical junction box
20. Air/fuel regulation cams
21. Combustion air pressure switch
34. Safety solenoid valve
35. Working solenoid valve
36. Gas pressure switches
37. Pilot gas train
8
FLAME DIMENSIONS DIAGRAM
COMBUSTIBLE DIESEL OIL/OIL
LENGTH OF FLAME (m)

FLOW RATE (Kg/h)
DIAMETER OF FLAME (m)
The sizes are indicative and depend on the configuration, on the combustion chamber back pres-
sure and on the chimney draught. For the heavy fuel all bigger sizes have to be considered.
9
The values have been taken out from tests executed with flame tubes.
10
Pressure in combustion chamber
Flow rate
Flow rate
WORKING CURVES T 40
WORKING CURVES TR 40
11
TRANSPORT AND INSTALLATION
A. HANDLING
The burner is supplied in 2 parts (burner body and the electric fan) or in 3 parts (burner
body, electric fan and the control panel), which are generally placed on a wooden plat-
form.
The un/loading operations from the transportation vehicles must be implemented with
utmost attention in order not to damage the machine.
The control panel (if supplied separately) can be handled manually.
After having verified the weight, the lifting operations can be implemented by means of a
forklift as shown in the picture:
Or by means of the fasteners supplied and applied at the points shown in the picture:
ATTENTION: It is absolutely forbidden to stand beneath suspended loads and one must
always keep a safe distance from the machines used for the lifting operations.
Ensure that the lifting devices are in perfect condition and in compliance with the appli-
cable safety laws.
12
Remove packaging only when assembling and make sure there is no damage.
This must be carried out by qualified personnel following the instructions given in this
manual.
Check that the structure to which the burner must be secured has been constructed to
the highest standards of workmanship and check that there are no reasons why installa-
tion should not be successful.
Install the burner in its position and secure it using nuts and bolts (not supplied).
Check that it is stable and that there are no vibrations.
The burner must be positioned on the system in precisely the way shown on the dia-
grams agreed upon by the TECFLAM S.r.l. Technical Office and the System Manufac-
turers Technical Office.
If supplied separately from the burner, assemble the electric control panel mechanically
(using the brackets provided) in the position shown in the installation diagram, always
bearing in mind that:
the position must ensure the panel is not subjected to excessive radiative heat and/or a
dusty air current;
the location must be clearly visible in order to allow quick access to the emergency
switches.
Install the electric fan as shown in the diagram using the connections provided to con-
nect the fan to the air inlet (refer to page Errore. Il segnalibro non definito.).
The electric fan must be fastened well (devices not included in the TECFLAM supply)
and it must not transmit vibrations to the burner.
(Refer to the use of the flexible connection, page Errore. Il segnalibro non definito.).
Complete the fuel connections (inlet and outlet) using special flexible pipes that can
withstand a maximum pressure of 5 bar and that have a suitable cross-section for the
required capacity.
The length of these pipes must be established each time, depending on the type of sys-
tem. For this reason, they are not included in the standard version.
If the fuel is fed in a different way or the required properties (flow rate, pressure, tem-
perature) are not respected, TECFLAM S.r.l. will not be held reliable for incorrect ma-
chine operation.
13
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
These must be made by specialised personnel (*).

Once mechanical installation has been completed, connect using the multicore connec-
tions provided, pre-cabled at our site.
If the electrical panel is supplied separately, the other connections are through multicore
connections.
Do not leave the cables free, but secure them using clips or similar and ensure their path
keeps away from the hottest areas.
Check that the voltage and frequency correspond to the burner rating.
Check the efficiency of the earthing system. Do not use gas pipes for this purpose but
comply with applicable standards.
Check the cross-section of the cables. The electrical system must be suitable for the
maximum power absorbed by the burner.
Do not use adaptors, flying cables, extensions or multiple sockets and comply with stan-
dards to the letter. Do not remove the cables using force. Do not touch the equipment
with wet or damp parts of the body and/or in bare feet.
It is advisable to earth the metal parts.
The power supply to the panel must be created by specialised personnel following the
wiring diagram and in compliance with applicable standards.
The power supply includes:
- three-phase power supply + N + E (make sure that neutral is at 0V);
- thermostat signals from the general control panel to the equipment in use;
- safety signal from the general control panel to the equipment in use;
- Stop signal transmitted from the burner control panel to the main control panel.
CAUTION
During assembly, follow the instructions in this handbook and accident prevention regu-
lations to the letter and in particular:
Do not wear rings, watches, bracelets and scarves.
Always use gloves, shoes and all the personal protective equipment envisaged;
If it is necessary to perform soldering, use the appropriate glasses, masks, gloves etc.;
The electrical components and their power lines must comply with applicable standards
and be compatible with the envisaged wiring diagram.
Before performing any maintenance, disconnect the machine from the electricity supply
by interrupting the power line to the panel.
14
STARTING-UP
This must be carried out by qualified personnel authorised by TECFLAM S.r.l.

Once the electrical and mechanical connections are implemented, run an electrical simu-
lation to verify that all has been assembled correctly.
Check the direction of rotation of the fan and pump motors (see arrow).
Check that the programmer, located inside the panel, is working correctly.
Simulate signal exchange with the panel of the main equipment being used with the
burner (thermostat, safety, blocking signal).
Check the fuel supply system, ensuring that:
The type of fuel and supply pressure correspond with that stipulated during the
planning phase (refer to the data on the plate);
the supply line has been sized taking the maximum burner capacity into consid-
eration;
the line is equipped with safety devices as envisaged by applicable standards;
the person creating the power line has first cleaned inside all the piping and
checked the operating pressure seal;
the supply line is equipped with the necessary devices for proper operation.
Page 9 contains a diagram of the hydraulic system of the burner, which must be in-
cluded for this to be started and set correctly.
After the above-mentioned checks have been carried out, open the manual fuel cut-off
valve and check the pressure values indicated on the specific pressure gauges. Adjust
them if needed by acting on the pressure regulator upstream the gas valve ramp.
Pressure upstream the gas valve ramp must be as designed (see identification plate
data) with a maximum offset of 10%.
GAS OPERATION (MODULATING)
If there are no blocks in the work thermostat is ON the blower starts up. The operation of
the blower allows the air pressure switch to detect its presence and therefore to continue
the cycle (washing phase).
The valve seal control (when present) is carried out automatically making sure no fuel
leaks from the gas valve ramp towards the burner zone.
At this point, the ignition electrodes are powered and the spark goes off. After a few in-
stants the gas line towards the ignition pilot light opens up (if present).
When ignition has occurred the flame detection photocell gives its consent for the cycle
to continue. Should ignition fail, the flame detection photocell blocks the burner. The
time between the opening of gas and the blocking signal is set down by standards in
force.
If the programmer detects no faults, it allows the gas valve to open.
The gas valve ramp is equipped with a throttle valve controlled by a servomotor. De-
pending on the signal received from the control thermostat (modulating) the servomotor,
by means of the throttle valve, acts as a choker changing the gas flow rate to the burner.
The manufacturer of the system and the TECFLAM S.r.l. technical department must
agree on the type of thermostat/thermoregulator to be used.
15
If the gas valve ramp is equipped with an electronic valve seal control, in the event of
gas leakage this device also originates alarm situations highlighted by the specific indi-
cator light on the electric panel.
The first start-up must be carried out with the specific selector switch of the control board
at the MANUAL position to make sure that the burner remains at the minimum function-
ing flow rate. In this position, the air/gas ratio must be correct to prevent blockage or
malfunctioning (refer to the following chapter: Regulation).
16
Should the burner block, an indicator light on the programmer and on the front control panel of the
burner turns on. The signal is usually sent to the main control panel of the system which activates
a light and acoustic alarm.
- It is normal for it to block with the first start-up

- To reset, press the button on the programmer (which is also found on the front part
of the control panel of the burner) to repeat the start-up cycle. Should it continue to
block, you must contact a specialised technician.
N.B. The position of the programmer when the block occurs is saved to provide an indi-
cation of the cause (refer to the detailed instructions attached).
17
REGULATION
After having started-up the burner at minimum, all the devices must be set to optimise
machine efficiency.
Gas regulation is normally carried out by simply acting on the stabiliser.
Modulation
The variation of power is continuous from minimum to maximum; this is achieved using a
servomotor which regulates air and fuel at the same time (see layout on following page).
The less powerful models generally (though not necessarily) do not have a pilot,
whereas the more powerful models do. The air and gas throttle valve and the pressure
governor of the diesel oil fuel outlet are controlled by levers deriving from the servomo-
tor. A steel cam is fastened on a wheel and a profile (cam) is produced by acting on
special Allen screws. Rotation of the wheel (controlled by the servomotor) determines
translating movements on the feeler pin (a bearing) of the lever (refer to the drawing on
the following page), which varies the opening of the gas throttle valve or the flow of die-
sel oil and the opening of the air blades downstream the electric fan.
Regarding this, refer to the work curves from page 21 to 24.
These curves are obtained with the standard models of the listed electric fans. However,
since more suitable fans can be chosen for each situation, there are actually several
work curves for each head model.
A correct setting involves implementing fuel tests in at least 5 levels of power: minimum,
25%, 50%, 75%, maximum.
Deflector disk / diffuser

In order to optimise burner operation in the system (boiler, dryer, oven, etc.), it is often
necessary to intervene on the burner head itself in order to achieve better mixing and
correct operation at all speeds.
The type of deflector disk (outer diameter, hole diameter, type of finning, with or without
corrector) in relation to the type of nozzle (short and long head, smooth or conical) and
the distance between the disk and the nozzle are important.
Tecflam S.r.l. seeks to make its burner as versatile as possible. During supply, it also at-
tempts to get an in-depth insight into the type of installation in order to provide a ma-
chine which is customised for the intended use. This does not, though, exclude the need
to adjust and/or replace components in some conditions.
These operations, just like those described in previous points, must be implemented by
specialised personnel, duly trained and authorised by TECFLAM (refer to the diagram on
the previous page).
Combustion air pressure switch

This is regulated during testing and generates an alarm signal in the event that pressure
levels lower than the calibration value are detected.
18
A) SERVOMOTOR + WHEEL
B) HEAD WITH DEFLECTOR/NOZZLE
Ignition device
This is used to generate the spark which acts as a trigger for combustion for the burner
pilot flame or the low burner flame.
19
In general, it is composed of two electrodes positioned as shown below:
The distance between the electrodes must be approximately 3 mm, and at no other point
must the metal rods be at a limited distance in relation to a metal surface (in order to
prevent the risk of discharges in incorrect zones).
Flame detection
This can take place in two different ways:
a) Ionisation probe
This is a spark plug similar to the electrode. It does not require regulation (unless it
discharges to earth or is outside the flame flow), only maintenance.
b) UV photocell
This is a flame detection device. It is positioned during the assembly phase (on site)
and does not require regulation, only maintenance.
Both devices must block the burner if the flame is not detected within a period of time
(established by applicable regulations) from when the nozzle opens, which is a function
carried out by the relative control equipment.
Regulating the pilot flame

In burner fitted with a pilot flame, it is possible regulate the pressure of the gas to the pi-
lot flame using a special solenoid valve.
20
Flow rate
Flow rate
Flow rate
WORKING CURVES T10
WORKING CURVES T 25
21
Flow rate
Flow rate
WORKING CURVES T 60
22
Flow rate
Flow rate
WORKING CURVES T 80
23
Flow rate
WORKING CURVES T 120

Flow rate
24
MAINTENANCE
GENERAL RULES
Before any maintenance intervention which could pose a danger for workers or third par-
ties, it is necessary to take all the safety measures necessary to comply with applicable
accident prevention regulations. Prevent the burner from being operated using the safety
switch provided.
The frequency of the recommended checks and interventions depends on the conditions
and times of use. For average usage, an annual check is advisable. Good maintenance
requires constant, methodical checks on all the components. The instruments and work-
ing equipment necessary for correct maintenance are those normally in the possession
of an assembly/electromechanical maintenance technician.
STANDARD MAINTENANCE
The burner requires a periodic check to ensure safety, high levels of performance and
operation with optimum emissions.
Clean the machine thoroughly (while it is at a standstill) once a week, to remove any
dust deposits which could damage and pose a risk to the burner body, the electrical
panel and the valve train.
Check the intensity of the ignition spark visually. Replace the electrode or ignition trans-
former at the first sign of malfunctioning.
The intensity of the ionisation probe or the UV cell must be checked by specialised per-
sonnel during planned maintenance.
On a periodic basis, check that the fan operates correctly, making sure that there are no
excessive vibrations or absorptions by the electric motor (refer to the rating).
On a periodic basis, check that the pressure switches activated operate correctly.
Remove the protective netting from the fan extraction opening (while the motor is not
powered electrically) and check conditions inside the box, cleaning if necessary.
At least once a year verify that all the electric cables are fastened well with the screws
that connect them to the various terminals and the cable-seal fittings are well tightened.
Moreover, verify that the wiring diagram and the user manual of the burner are present.
Before starting up the burner after a prolonged standstill, have it checked by specialised
personnel.
According to the frequency of use (continuous/discontinuous operation etc.), it is advis-
able to have specialised personnel perform periodic combustion tests using approved,
calibrated equipment.
It is strictly forbidden for unauthorised personnel to edit the values of the air/fuel ratio.
During annual maintenance, remove the burner head by unscrewing the screws on the
rear flange and check the condition of the:
- deflector
- nozzle
- gas pipes
- electrodes
- flame detection
Perform maintenance on each device according to the specific instructions in the techni-
cal files in the last chapter.
Once a month, check the value of the diesel oil atomisation pressure deriving from pump
wear.
25
SAFETY
C. GENERAL RULES
TECFLAM burners are equipped with safety devices as envisaged by applicable stan-
dards.
The covers must always be installed and kept closed. Open or removed casings and
doors constitute major sources of danger.
Ensure that the safety switches always function properly.
A burner which is stopped by an emergency switch cannot be restarted unless the
switch is reset.
The burner and its components must only be cleaned and lubricated while the system is
at a standstill.
Cleaning the equipment promotes operating safety and system hygiene.
If any there are any leaks of oil or grease, these must be dealt with and any holes filled.
Traces of oil or grease on the floor are an accident risk for personnel.
Safety devices must be maintained in perfect working order and must not be rendered
ineffective. The manufacturer will not be held liable in this case.
Faulty systems and/or electrical equipment must be repaired or replaced immediately.
Do not place electric cables on the ground or in areas where they could pose an acci-
dent risk.
D. SAFETY RULES
The burner must only be used for the use for which it has been produced. Any other use
is considered improper and may be dangerous.
TECFLAM S.r.l. will not be held liable in this case.
It is not permitted to modify the burner to alter its performance or intended use. It is not
permitted to tamper with the components unless authorisation is received from
TECFLAM S.r.l.
If the burner is to remain idle for a long period of time, it is advisable to disconnect the
panel master switches and interrupt fuel supply. Protect against atmospheric agents
such as rain, snow, ice, dust etc.
In the presence of the smell of gas, do not action any electrical switches or anything else
that can generate sparks. Close the manual interception valve of the gas upstream on
the supply line, open doors and windows to air the premises and prohibit any operators
from intervening.
Have professionally qualified personnel check that the burners thermal power range is
compatible with the system and that the feeding of combustion air and the evacuation of
fumes take place correctly.
Keep children and unskilled personnel away from the burner area. Do not obstruct the
burners extraction and/or discharge grilles and the ventilation openings in the place of
installation.
Do not rest anything on the burner; it must not get wet by water or other liquids.
The burner room must be clean and free from volatile solid substances in order to elimi-
nate any risk of fire and/or malfunctioning.
26
E. RISK ANALYSIS
i) MOVING PARTS AND MECHANICAL RISKS

The parts normally in motion are the blower fan, the cooling fan of the atomisation pump.
They are fully protected. Never remove the protective netting on the extraction side
unless performing maintenance with the motor at a standstill.
The burner is made of metal structural work. This means that some edges are unavoid-
able but are not dangerous. Always use personal protective equipment.
ii) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGES

The part of the system manufactured on site must respect the applicable standards.
Under no circumstances must the protection devices for the conductors and connections
be tampered with.
Before starting up the machine, check that the electrical panel door is closed.
In order to prevent the (low) risk of the air flow generating electrostatic charges, it is es-
sential to earth the metal masses using suitable means (the system on which the burner
is installed is generally earthed and therefore the mechanical installation of the burner
makes this procedure automatic).
iii) RISK OF BURNS

Prevent unauthorised personnel from approaching the machine. The machine may stay
hot for a long time after it has been turned off.
iv) DUST
The primary air flow comes into direct contact with the flame, therefore no particles of
combustible substances which could catch fire or be deposited in areas, therefore gen-
erating a fire hazard, must be present in suspension.
It is essential to check or treat the primary air properly, for example through specific fil-
tration devices.
v) EXPLOSIONS
Any leakage of gas could lead to areas having dangerous levels of concentration and
the consequent risk of explosions.
The burner is fitted with all the safety devices prescribed by applicable standards. Only
thorough, periodic maintenance can ensure that maximum efficiency is maintained. It
must therefore be stressed that frequent, thorough checks are essential.
vi) NOISE
The noise level of the machine is about 80 dB, but the noise to which the operator may
be subjected should be assessed taking into account the burner and system together.
It is advisable to make use of personal protective equipment (earplugs or ear defenders).
27
TROUBLESHOOTING
Below is a list of possible faults that can easily be resolved with the help of a technician specialised
in burners.
FAULT PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION
Check for any intervention of the

pressure switches.
Check that the fuses on the power
lines are intact.
No electric consent for start-up. Check the state of the programmer.
Check the state of the emergency
button.
The fan motor does not start. Check the state of the thermal protec-
tion device.
Safely block activated. Press the release/reset button
Motor fault. Replace the motor.
Check the gas pressure.

The gas valves open but the burner does No gas in line or low pressure.
not ignite. Ignition electrodes mass.
Check calibration.
Programmer fault Replace
Transformer fault Replace
Adjust the distance between the elec-

Problem with electrodes
The burner blocks without going on trodes
for ignition
Replace the electrodes
Check the electrical connections.
Check the calibration of the pressure
The air pressure switch is intervening. switch.
Check that the connection pipe to the
channel is not blocked.
Check the air setting and diesel oil
setting
Check the diesel oil pressure
Intervention of flame
Check the diesel oil temperature.
detection device
The burner starts but blocks immediately Check the correct position of the
probe/UV cell
Replace the probe/UV cell
Programmer fault. Replace the programmer.
(*) The terms qualified and specialised refer to personnel as described in Italian Law 46/90.
28
GAS TRAIN VALVES
TECFLAM S.r.l. wishes to thank you for having chosen this machine and places its
technical service at your disposal in order to solve any problems regarding the use and
maintenance of this machine and any other machines produced by us.
For any problems or queries, customers should contact:
TECFLAM S.r.l.
Via Curiel, 3 Corte Tegge 42025 Cavriago (RE)
TEL. 0522/944207 FAX 0522/494091
tecflam@tecflam.it
www.tecflam.it
Please read this manual carefully before assembly, setting at work or performing main-
tenance or repairs of the machine.
It must be used to learn basic information which enables to work correctly with the ma-
chine in question, and may be used as a reference for maintenance work and any re-
pairs, as it contains information, advice and warnings directed towards optimum use
and upkeep of the machine.
TECFLAMs burners are the result of many years of experience in the maintenance
sector; with their state-of-the-art technology and high level of performance these prod-
ucts have been designed to the requirements of the standards in force and manufac-
tured to ensure a high level of reliability.
TECFLAM S.r.l. would like to remind its Customers that simple maintenance opera-
tions carried out at regular intervals by expert technicians keep the machine perform-
ing in peak condition through time.
2
SUMMARY
GENERAL WARNINGS 4
A. DOCUMENTATION
B. RECEPTION
C. STORAGE
D. INSTALLATION
E. START UP AND ADJUSTMENT
F. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENTS
G. MAINTENANCE / CLEANING
H. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY
I. WARRANTY
J. CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 8
TRANSPORT AND INSTALLATION 9

A. HANDLING
ELECTRIC CONNECTIONS 10
START UP 11
ADJUSTMENT 12
GAS ON-OFF TAP
VIBRATION-DAMPING JOINT
FILTER
PRESSURE REDUCER (PRESENT IF NECESSARY)
PRESSURE STABILIZER
GAS SOLENOID VALVES
PRESSURE SWITCHES
MOTOR-DRIVEN BUTTERFLY VALVE
VALVE LEAKAGE CONTROL DEVICE (PRESENT WHEN REQUIRED BY THE REGULATION
IN FORCE)
MAINTENANCE 14
SAFETY 15
A. GENERAL STANDARDS
B. SAFETY STANDARDS
MAIN COMPONENTS TECHNICAL CARDS 16
3
GENERAL WARNINGS
A. Documentation
These instructions are for the use of personnel who are authorised to use and supervise
the machine. This documentation is an integral and essential part of the product and
must not be separated from it.
B. Reception
The machine must be visually inspected immediately on arrival. If it has been damaged
during transport, it is necessary to follow the procedure for covering damages set down
in the supply contract.
C. Storage
Machines and instruments that cannot be immediately installed in their rooms must be
stored in their packaging in a sheltered place protected from weather conditions or other
factors that may cause damage.
D. Installation
The machine and its parts must only be installed by qualified personnel (authorised by
TECFLAM S.r.l.), in compliance with all provided instructions.
E. Start up and adjustment
The machine must only be set at work and adjusted by specialised personnel. Before
setting at work, it is essential to know well all the warnings contained in the documenta-
tion provided together with the machine and comply with all the indications provided for.
F. Protection against accidents
All the instructions for accident prevention set down in this documentation must be com-
plied with.
TECFLAM S.r.l. endeavours to manufacture its machines in conformity with the interna-
tional safety standards in force. The customer is responsible for providing, on when plac-
ing the order, any special/additional safety requirements. Should these require extra ex-
pense, this shall be to the charge of the customer.
G. Maintenance / Cleaning
Maintenance must only be carried out by qualified personnel (*) who knows the instruc-
tions in this documentation.
To ensure machines efficiency it is essential a regular maintenance carried out by tech-
nicians authorised by TECFLAM S.r.l.
Cleaning operations must be carried out in accordance with the instructions set down in
the documentation provided.
(*) By qualified or skilled personnel we mean authorised personnel according to the law 46/90.
4
H. Intellectual property
TECFLAM S.r.l. reserves all rights connected to this document and the machine pre-
sented herein. The customer acknowledges these rights and agrees not to transfer the
content of this document to third parties without prior written authorisation and not to use
the machine for any purpose other than the one for which it was provided.
I. Warranty
Warranty is provided according to the agreement clauses. Original TECFLAM spare

parts must be used. No warranty service can be claimed for damage caused by the use
of unauthorised spare parts. Under no circumstances is the manufacturer responsible for
improper treatment, failure to comply with these provisions and incorrect manipulation by
unauthorised personnel.
J. Change of ownership
If the machine is transferred to third parties, it is mandatory to ensure that the instruc-
tions manual is supplied with the machine itself.
TECFLAM S.r.l. declines all responsibility for failure to carry out all the operations set
down below, in the event of negligence and/or tampering.
5
GAS TRAIN VALVES
The gas train valves of the burner are made of components which are used for adjust-
ment and safety of the burner itself.
We represent hereunder an example of used gas train valves:
6
COMPONENTS OF THE GAS TRAIN VALVES
1 Fuel on-off valve.
2 Vibration-damping joint.
3 Filter.
4 Pressure stabilizer.
5 Maximum gas pressure switch.
6 Minimum gas pressure switch.
7 Valve leakage control pressure switch.
8 Fuel solenoid valve unit.
9 0-250 mbar pressure gauge.
10 0-50 mbar pressure gauge.
11 Modulating valve.
12 Servomotor.
13 On-off valve of the pilot burner line.
14 Pressure stabilizer of the pilot burner line.
15 Safety solenoid valve of the pilot burner.
16 Adjustment solenoid valve of the pilot burner.
(*) The above-mentioned components and their disposition in the diagram can be changed without
notice. The information included in this manual is only indicative.
7
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
The gas supply unit is manufactured in compliance with the standards EN 7462.
It is capable of feeding the burner to which it is allocated in compliance with the strictest
safety standards, whatever the type of operation (modulating, two-stage, etc.).
The various components of the gas train valves are top quality and regularly certified for
their allocated use.
The assembly is carried out using threaded or flanged hydraulic fittings with insertion of
specific gasket to guarantee their seal.
The components are dimensioned according to the load losses generated at the maxi-
mum project capacity and extrapolated from the documentation supplied by the compo-
nent manufacturers.
8
TRANSPORT AND INSTALLATION
A. HANDLING
- The gas train valves weight allows it to be handled manually.

- In order to guarantee the integrity of the product, this is often packed on a wooden pallet
(together with the burner if the supply is complete), with or without sides, and in this case
a fork lift truck may be used to handle it.
CAUTION!
Absolutely avoid staying beneath overhung loads and always keep at safety distance
from lifting machines.
Please note: Make sure that the lifting devices are in perfect condition and that they
comply with the safety laws in force.
- This must be performed by authorised personnel in compliance with the instructions set
down in this manual.
- Remove any packaging only at the time of setting at work and check that there is no
damage.
- Install the gas train valves on the burner to which they are allocated following the instruc-
tions agreed on when placing the order.
- Check that the specifications on the gas train valves rating plate are compatible with the
available gas supply line (type of gas, max. and min. pressure, pipe diameter, max. ca-
pacity).
- Check that the supply line has been realized according to the regulations in force and is
equipped with the necessary devices for correct operation.
- Install the gas train valves mechanically, connecting the fuel supply to the manual on-off
valve in closing position. At this stage:
Remove any protective plastic plugs and blow (without pressurising the devices) to
remove any residues, dust, etc.
Bear in mind that optimum installation recommends that the valve unit (or at least
the pilot solenoid valve) are kept as close as possible to the burner.
The valves may function in the three positions even at right angles from each other
but MUST NEVER face downwards.
The stabilizer calibration membrane MUST be in a horizontal position.
Connect the pilot (if present) from the dedicated solenoid valve to the connection
on the burner by the pipe provided standard and already fitted (in the case of com-
plete supplies from TECFLAM) with dedicated connection pipe fittings.
Carry out, if necessary, the safety breather pipe from the solenoid valves to the
outside.
The gas train valves must be fixed using the dedicated supports and/or brackets to
ensure that all components are completely stable.
9
ELECTRIC CONNECTIONS
- These must be carried out by authorised personnel in accordance with the operating wir-
ing diagrams and the standards of reference.
- If the gas train valves are part of a burner supplied by TECFLAM all wiring is entirely car-
ried out by TECFLAM, which is responsible for the complete supply.
- If the TECFLAM supply is limited to the gas train valves these are usually supplied with-
out any electric connections. In this case it is obligatory for the customer and/or installer
to reach an agreement with TECFLAMs technical department for a wiring diagram suit-
able for the burner and type of operation (modulating, two-stage, etc.).
- If a diagram is not sent to TECFLAM by the user, countersigned by both parties,
TECFLAM shall not be responsible for the correct use of the gas train valves as regards
wiring and safety.
- If the supply is limited to the gas train valves and there is an agreed wiring diagram, the
installer is responsible for carrying out wiring workmanlike and in compliance with the
diagrams.
10
START UP
The first time the gas train valves are set at work is necessarily contemporaneously with
the equipment being served (generally a burner) and it is essential that this operation is
carried out by a technician authorised by TECFLAM and with the necessary skills.
- Before setting at work, check all the connections (mechanical, hydraulic and electric).
- Comply with the instructions in this manual and the safety standards mentioned in the
manual itself.
- Check the mains supply pressure and proceed only if this is as agreed (see the rating
plate) with an approximation of 10% max (in any case, never in excess of 300 mbar for
medium pressure gas train valves and never in excess of 5 bar for high pressure gas
train valves with pressure reducer).
- Remove any air from the line by loosening a flange or using the dedicated breather ori-
fices on the stabilizers and valves.
- Adjust the main stabilizer checking the pressure on the dedicated gauge positioned
downstream of the stabilizer itself. For adjustment see the stabilizer technical card in-
serted later on.
- Carry out the same operation as above for the pilot stabilizer if present.
- For high pressure gas train valves, it is necessary to install a pressure reducer upstream
of them to obtain an outlet pressure (at the main stabilizer inlet) of 300 mbar.
- If the pressure to the solenoid valves is too high, it could cause malfunctions or damages
to these and put them out of use (see maximum solenoid valves use pressure in the
dedicated technical cards inserted later on).
- Check safety pressure switches calibration, according to used pressures.
- Adjust the minimum, maximum and start point position of the butterfly valves drive ser-
vomotors, which allow the modulation. These positions depend on the features of the
system in which the burner is installed.
- An approximate calibration is carried out in Factory by TECFLAM technicians, but it is
essential to check it to optimize the machine operation.
- Simulate the gas train valves test checking that the signals are exchanged correctly both
with burner electric panel and system electric panel (if present).
- Start the burner by opening the fuel on-off tap.
- Allow the fuel to fill the gas train valves length upstream of the work safety solenoid
valves by removing any air inside, by means of the stabilizer outlet pipe tap fitting.
- In the event of shut-down or stop, the position in which the programmer stops gives an
indication of what has caused this.
11
ADJUSTMENT
Gas train valves adjustment is to be carried out by expert personnel and depends on the
system features. A specification of main components normally used is inserted later on.
Gas on-off tap

This has no adjustment devices, and must either be opened or closed; in the OPEN po-
sition the lever must be parallel to the pipe, in the CLOSED position the lever must be
perpendicular to the pipe.
Vibration-damping joint
This has no adjustment devices. It is used to damp any vibrations.
Filter
This has no adjustment devices. It is installed to intercept any impurities.
Pressure reducer (present if necessary)

It is used when the fuel supply line pressure is > 500 mbar. To adjust downstream pres-
sure, it is necessary to act on the dedicated calibration spring; by screwing the screw,
the pressure increases; by unscrewing the screw, it decreases.
Pressure stabilizer
This is the main device for adjustment; it is first adjusted by TECFLAM in factory by pro-
viding the stabilizer with a SPRING suitable for the desired output pressure range.
The springs are of different colours according to the calibration range; to adjust down-
stream pressure (the standard is 150 mbar for natural gas), it is necessary to act on the
dedicated spring; by screwing the screw, the pressure increases; by unscrewing the
screw, it decreases.
Gas solenoid valves

Only solenoid valves which are destined for this use can be used to adjust the gas flow;
those destined to operate either totally closed or totally open, such as safety and
breather solenoid valves, cannot be used for this purpose.
Normally, solenoid valves which can be adjusted have either a hexagonal-head socket
screw under the valve body, or a screw with a slotted head for screwdrivers positioned
under a threaded aluminium cover in the upper part.
The maximum exercise pressure is indicated in the dedicated technical cards.
Pressure switches
These make an electric contact when a set pressure threshold (maximum pressure,
minimum pressure, differential pressure) is reached. The correct calibration value de-
pends both on the system and on the fuel supply pressure.
Motor-driven butterfly valve

This is the device for modulation (it is only fitted to gas train valves for modulating burn-
ers supply). In gas train valves for modulating burners supply, the rotation transmission
is achieved by direct connection between servomotor and fuel butterfly valve.
Adjustment consists in determining the optimum valve opening degree in the minimum
and maximum power positions, and in the starting point position. The device is fitted with
a selector for manual and automatic control. In the manual position it is possible to set
the operation ranges.
Valve leakage control device (present when required by the regulation in force)
This device checks that there is no fuel blow-by from the gas train valves to the burner.
12
Only the pressure switch of the electronic device controlling valve seal, if present, must
be adjusted.
The electronic device controlling valve leakage may be positioned either in the gas train
valves connector block or in the burner control panel.
13
MAINTENANCE
GENERAL STANDARDS
WARNING!
Before performing any maintenance which may be dangerous for operators or other per-
sons, it is necessary to carry out all the safety measures required by the accident pre-
vention regulations in force. It is particularly important to disconnect the fan using the
dedicated safety switch.
Good maintenance requires inspection of all machine components at regular intervals,

varying the frequency of these inspections according to the hours and conditions of ac-
tual use.
The instruments and tools necessary for correct maintenance are those normally in-
cluded in the standard equipment of a technician working as an electromechanical fitter-
service engineer.
Standard maintenance:
- At least once a year the gas train valves maintenance must be carried out by authorised
skilled personnel in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and the regulations
in force.
- Although the gas train valves require no radical maintenance, they need to be checked
continuously to ensure safety and optimum operation.
- Clean accurately once a week (with the machine shut down) to remove any deposits of
dust which could cause damages to burner body, control panel and gas train valves.
- Every 3 months check in simulation (by calibration) the pressure switches, verifying that
these intervene below the safety thresholds.
- Once a week check, on the gauges provided, that the fuel pressure is the same of when
the calibration was carried out.
- Once a year carry out a check on the surface protection condition of the various compo-
nents.
- At least once a year check that all the electrical cables are well-connected and the clamp
screws to the terminals are tight; check that the wiring diagram and instructions manual
of both the burner and the gas train valves are present.
- Comply with the general warnings previously fully illustrated.
- The filter must be cleaned at least once every 3 months to avoid that the fuel pressure
upstream of the burner decreases considerably.
14
SAFETY
A. GENERAL STANDARDS
TECFLAMs burners are provided with safety devices required by the standards in force.
The fairings must always be fitted and kept closed. Guards and hatches which are left
open or removed are the cause of extremely dangerous accidents.
Safety switches correct operation must be ensured at all times.
A burner shut-down by an emergency switch cannot be started up unless the same
switch has first been released.
The burner and its components must only be cleaned and greased when the system is
switched off.
Clean equipment helps both operation safety and system hygiene.
Any oil or grease blow-by must be removed and the leak must be plugged. Grease or oil
spills on the floor may be the cause of accidents for operators.
Safety devices must be kept in perfect working order and must not be made ineffective.
We decline all responsibility for failure to comply with this condition.
Faulty electric systems and/or equipment must be repaired or replaced immediately.
Do not place electric cables on the floor or in any areas where they may cause acci-
dents.
B. SAFETY STANDARDS
- The gas train valves must only be destined for the use for which they were produced;
any other use must be considered IMPROPER and therefore DANGEROUS and ex-
empts TECFLAM from all responsibility.
- Modifications must not be made to the equipment to alter its performance.
- In the event of typical gas smell being perceived, do not use electric switches, tele-
phones or any other device that could cause sparks. Close the manual on-off gas valve,
open doors and windows to air the rooms, and request the intervention of authorised
personnel.
- Intervention on the gas train valves by unskilled personnel is strictly prohibited.
- It is strictly prohibited to carry out work near the gas train valves unless the gas on-off
tap has first been closed.
15
MAIN COMPONENTS TECHNICAL CARDS
16
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY AND WARRANTY
1. Premise The set of documents specifically indicated in the individual letters of the purchase order define each supply and form an integral
part of each order.
The supply of goods comprises only that which is specifically expressed in the purchase order and are exclusively controlled by present gen-
eral conditions except when otherwise stated under explicit written agreement.
Eventual variations or communications during the course of supply does in no way constitute a renewal of the contract. Eventual absorptions
or supplements of the order are intended to be subordinate to these very general conditions.
All the obligations and responsibilities in executing the order are carried by Tecflam Srl, with the exception of the following, of which onus falls
under the Buyer :
a) All materials and work not specified in the order and eventual levies (indirect).
b) All work and supplies of bricklaying, carpentry, spray painting, scaffolding, bridges and cranes, together with any other type of building
equipment needed for the plant.
c) Labour assistance for Tecflam Srl personnel, for the duration of the intervention.
d) The flues, starting from Tecflams indicated equipment.
e) The discharge of water from the plant and equipment.
f) The necessary fuel for testing the functionality, be it preliminary or final.
g) Electrical lines up to the electrical box of the burner and from these to the eventual distant signals and commands, even the fuel hoses
with the connectors or the gas train supplied with the burner.
h) The transport costs of the goods from Tecflam Srl head office to the working site.
2. Proposals, acceptance and confirmation of orders The proposals made by Tecflam Srl, whether verbal or written, are not binding.
The intended contract is deemed to be concluded from the date of the received order by Tecflam Srl moreover, with the right to even withdraw
after the above mentioned date.
The order is considered to be tacitly accepted and confirmed, in the case of Tecflam Srl not objecting to the buyer, within 15 days from order
received, the order is deemed to be accepted.
3. Prices - Except contrary to mutual consent, the prices are said to be in force at the moment of delivery or shipment of the goods and the
prices are intended to be those according to the ones specifically expressed in the order (confirmed) and expiry date agreed upon. These do
not include services and responsibilities not mentioned, in particular, any indirect taxes after the sale are always at the expense of the Buyer.
The packaging does not need to be returned.
In the case of pre-delivering of the goods, there should be a variation in the purchasing costs due to inflation, duties or monetary devaluation,
Tecflam Srl has the right to adjust the prices previously agreed upon, thereby giving notice to the Buyer. In the case of the Buyer not accept-
ing the new prices, the original order will be null and void in every sense only in relation to the parts affected by the price variation, with the
Buyer having no right to compensation or indemnity of any sort.
4. Deliveries Shipments The delivery terms are indicative and are not binding on Tecflam Srl. The delivery period runs from the date of or-
der and in any case does not start until the first of payments of the order has been received, of which was agreed upon. Tecflam Srl has the
right to adequately extend the lead time should there be factors caused independent to the good will and diligence of Tecflam Srl, such as
eventual delays of sub contractors.
In particular, Tecflam Srl, is not held liable for delays in deliveries of the plant in the case of:
a) The Buyer has not fulfilled the conditions of payment stipulated.
b) The Buyer did not carry out suitable, building work that was necessary.
c) There have been changes to the order during the carrying out of the plant.
d) They have been hindered due to Force Majeure.
Tecflam Srl is not held accountable in any way for eventual damages, direct or indirect, compensations or costs incurred due to late deliver-
ies, interruptions or partial or total cancellations of supply, what so ever the case may be, over and above the eventual sum stipulated as pen-
alties in the contract.
The delivery is normally intended to be, the premises in Cavriago (RE).
The goods, even if sold at the destined place and transported by means of Tecflam Srl, always travels at the total risk and peril of the Buyer.
Even in the case that they are sent by courier chosen by Tecflam Srl, the buyer has to, at the moment of collection, do the appropriate verifi-
cations and eventual claims within 15 days from the date of expiry of the delivery note. Eventual insurance cover for transport risks are ef-
fected only on specific request from the Buyer and the total amount for his charge.
5. Testing The Buyer, before receiving delivery of the goods, has the right to test the work completed. Tecflam Srl must provide conditions for
the buyer to carry out the test.
By testing, we intend the operations listed as follows:
a) Electrical connections, with the condition that the terminal of the electrical point of 220 or 380 Volt is placed in such a position that con-
sents the connecting of the electrical control box of the burner already mounted on the generator. The terminal board of which is in the
control box of the burner, must have available an electrical line three phase + neutral + earth (220 V), protected by a switch, not auto-
matic, placed in the area of the boiler and apparatus of safety and control(thermostats, pressure switches etc).
b) Firing up and regulating the burner, combustion tests, on condition that the controls have already been done for the presence of liquid
fuel in the cistern or gaseous fuel in the fuel pipes and the possibility to distribute the energy during the testing.
After a successful testing has been effected, the supply is intended to be accepted by the Buyer, subjected to the guarantee of Tecflam Srl of
which the number 14 condition applies.
If, despite the invite made by Tecflam Srl, the Buyer neglects to proceed with testing without good reasons, although the result not having
been communicated within five working days, the supply is considered accepted. If the Buyer receives, without reserve, the delivery of the
goods, this is considered accepted even although the testing has not been done. If testing results show that the supply does not correspond
to the essential characteristics stipulated in the contract and Tecflam Srl is not in a position to fulfil the work, it has the right to renounce the
order with the only obligation in taking back the material already delivered, refunding the money received or replacing the supplied goods with
another that is perfectly functional and tested without the Buyer being able to claim indemnity for eventual damages.
6. Payment The equipment is manufactured for the entity corresponding to that on the order/confirmation.
Unless otherwise stipulated, payment should be made in cash at the moment of delivery of the goods at Tecflam Srl head office, or before the
delivery itself.
Whichever means chosen, with regards to the transfer of monies, the risk always remains that of the Buyers. The release of drafts, bills of ex-
change or any other form of payment on part of the buyer does not constitute a renewal, not of the contract nor of any contractual clauses.
Payment is due according to the stipulated agreements even in the case of late deliveries, goods being damaged or lost during transportation,
totally or partially, and even if goods are available for collection and not done so by the Buyer.
If payment of a previous order has not been executed or delayed or a single rate outstanding, this acquits Tecflam Srl from all obligations.
Under no circumstances may the Buyer defer the payments past the expiry dates stipulated. All late payments will be subjected to the usual
economic interest rates.
7. Reservation of property All goods supplied will only become property of the Buyer once full payment has been fulfilled and therefore re-
mains Tecflam Srl property until that point.
8. Withdrawal Suspension Cancellation - Tecflam Srl has the right to unilaterally withdraw without penalties incurred Art 1373 c.c even af-
ter commencement of the contract . In any given situation, Tecflam Srl can suspend or withdraw from the contract. Tecflam Srl has the right to
suspend or exit from the contract in the case that previous supplies were not paid or should the buyer not be able to provide guarantees of
payment.
9. Penalty clause - Should the Buyer not have paid for previous supplied goods, should Tecflam Srl withdraw from the current order, the Buyer
will pay Tecflam 20 % of the total amount of goods ordered plus any eventual or further damages and does not exempt Tecflam Srl from tak-
ing further legal actions to recover additional damages.
10. Contesting and claims - Any contesting or claims concerning services should be communicated to Tecflam Srl by means of letter of recom-
mendation within a period of 8 days from date of received goods of which the warranty would not be in force according to article 14. Eventual
contests or claims would never legitimize a delay or suspension of payment.
No claims concerning the quality of the goods can be done through a judicial process unless all payments of goods has been effected. No
claims are accepted concerning the quality of goods if there has been any modifications by the buyer.
Eventual claims or contests regarding a single delivery of goods does not allow the Buyer not to collect the remaining goods in accordance
with the contract.
11. Goods returned - In the event of goods being returned, they will be accepted only if by prior authorisation, in writing by Tecflam Srl, the
goods verified, and the Buyer is still obliged to effect payment within the time and method stipulated. Cost of transport for returning goods are
for the Buyers account, with exception should goods be wrongly supplied by Tecflam Srl.
12. Cancellation clause Should the Buyer not collect the goods, Tecflam Srl can declare the contract void and can through a judicial official,
sell the goods to defray expenses and recover damages.
13. Withdrawal from the Buyer the Buyer can withdraw from the contract, even if work has commenced, provided the Buyer pays all plus that
is due to losses.
14. Warranty:
a) Tecflam Srl guarantees good quality materials and limits the warranty only with respect to defects or wrong supplied goods, provided all
terms regarding payment were carried out by the Buyer. If the work has been accepted by the Buyer, the warranty is limited to latent de-
fects and those that were not known and revealed by Tecflam Srl.
b) The warranty is valid for the period of 12 months from the date of delivery note. After this period the warranty will automatically expire
even if the item has never been used.
c) The following is not under warranty. The electric motor of the fans and pumps and electrical components in general, the commissioning
or any other service rendered.
d) Every decision taken in substituting materials that fall under warranty must be undertaken by a technical staff member of Tecflam Srl.
e) A returned item that is under warranty will only be such, provided it be returned to Tecflam Srl head office and should be accompanied
by a detailed note indicating the reasons for the return and defects in the item.
f) In the case of substituting the product, the Buyer requires a call out by Tecflam Srl personnel, the working hours spent plus travelling
and lodging costs will be for the Buyers account and will be invoiced per usual.
g) Tecflam Srl reserves the right to ownership on all the parts that have been substituted. The spare parts or repaired parts are available
ex works Cavriago (RE).
h) Any substitution of parts does not constitute an extension of the warranty.
i) Any repair or work done by non authorized personnel or modification carried out without Tecflam Srl permission, warranty no longer in
effect.
j) The buyer having accepted the conditions of contract and warranty proposed by Tecflam Srl, renounces any request with regards to
any compensation or indemnity for damages, direct on indirect , due to the goods not being in operation. Claims does not give the
Buyer the right to cancel orders, nor reduce the price or withdraw from the contract of sale.
15. Trial: any legal contest that derives from a sale of contract will be contested in the magisterial district of Reggio Emilia (Italy).
16. Privacy law:- with this current order the buyer consents in the furnishing and handling of his personal details ex D.Lgs.n.196/2003 - Code for
protection of personal details.
Tecflam Srl
Please note - The above conditions of sale are for reference purposes only and are superseded by the original Italian version.
CONDIZIONI GENERALI DI FORNITURA E GARANZIA
1. Premesse Linsieme dei documenti specificamente indicati nelle singole lettere dordine definiscono ciascuna fornitura e costituiscono parte
integrante di ogni specifico ordine.
Le forniture comprendono solo quanto espressamente specificato nellordine e sono regolate esclusivamente dalle presenti condizioni gene-
rali, salvo deroghe risultanti da esplicito accordo scritto.
Eventuali variazioni o comunicazioni durante il corso della fornitura non costituiscono in alcun caso novazione del contratto. Eventuali riassor-
bimenti o supplementi dordine si intendono sottoposti a queste medesime condizioni generali.
Tutti gli obblighi e gli oneri necessari per lesecuzione dellordine sono a carico di Tecflam S.r.l., ad esclusione dei seguenti, da intendersi a
carico del Committente:
a) ogni materiale o lavoro non specificati nellordine e le eventuali tasse (indirette);
b) tutti i lavori e le provviste di muratore, falegname, verniciatore; le prestazioni di scale, ponti e argani, come ogni altra opera edilizia ine-
rente allimpianto;
c) la manovalanza in aiuto al personale di Tecflam S.r.l. per tutta la durata dellintervento;
d) i condotti di fumo, a partire dagli apparecchi nelle misure indicate da Tecflam S.r.l.;
e) lo scarico acqua dallimpianto e dagli apparecchi;
f) il combustibile necessario alle prove di funzionamento, sia preliminari che definitive;
g) le linee elettriche fino al quadro di comando del bruciatore e da questo agli eventuali segnalatori e comandi a distanza; anche le tuba-
zioni di combustibile fino allattacco con i flessibili o con le rampe gas fornite a corredo bruciatore;
h) collegamento dei flessibili o delle rampe gas alla tubazione del combustibile;
i) le spese di trasporto materiali dalla sede di Tecflam S.r.l. a pi dopera.
2. Offerte, accettazione e conferma dordine - Le offerte di Tecflam S.r.l., siano esse verbali o scritte, non sono impegnative.
Il presente contratto si intende concluso nel momento della data di ricezione dellordine da parte di Tecflam S.r.l., con facolt a questultima di
recedere anche successivamente a tale data.
Lordine si considera tacitamente accettato e confermato, qualora Tecflam S.r.l. non dia comunicazione contraria al Committente entro 15 gg
dal ricevimento dello stesso.
3. Prezzi Salvo accordi in contrario, si applicano i prezzi in vigore al momento della consegna o spedizione della merce e i prezzi stessi sono
da intendere secondo le modalit espressamente specificate nellordine (conferma) e alle scadenze convenute. Essi non comprendono pre-
stazioni od oneri non menzionati; in particolare, le imposte indirette afferenti la vendita sono sempre a carico del Committente (gli imballaggi
non si ricevono di ritorno).
Qualora prima della consegna della merce dovessero intervenire variazioni dei costi di acquisto conseguenti a maggiori oneri fiscali e/o doga-
nali, oppure a svalutazione monetaria, Tecflam S.r.l. ha facolt di modificare i prezzi previamente convenuti, dandone comunicazione
allacquirente. Qualora questultimo non intenda accettare i nuovi prezzi, loriginario ordine si intender privo di ogni effetto soltanto in relazio-
ne agli articoli interessati dalla variazione stessa, senza alcun diritto del Committente al risarcimento o indennit di sorta.
4. Consegne Spedizioni I termini di consegna sono indicativi e non impegnano Tecflam S.r.l. Il termine di consegna decorre dal giorno
dellordine ed in ogni caso non ha inizio prima del ricevimento della prima rata di pagamento allordine, quando sia stata concordata. Esso si
intende di diritto adeguatamente prorogato se insorgessero cause indipendenti dalla buona volont e diligenza di Tecflam S.r.l., ivi compresi
eventuali ritardi di sub-fornitori.
In particolare, Tecflam S.r.l. non tenuta a rispondere del ritardo di consegna dellimpianto qualora:
a) Il Committente non si sia uniformato alle condizioni di pagamento pattuite;
b) Il Committente non abbia eseguito le opere murarie idonee che doveva predisporre;
c) siano state portate modificazioni allordine durante lesecuzione dellimpianto;
d) siano stati impedimenti di forza maggiore.
Tecflam S.r.l. non tenuta a corrispondere indennizzi di sorta per eventuali danni diretti o indiretti, compensi o spese dovuti a ritardi di conse-
gna, o a interruzione o a risoluzione parziale o totale della fornitura, qualunque ne sia la causa, allinfuori della somma eventualmente pattuita
per contratto a titolo di penale.
La consegna si intende normalmente perfezionata franco stabilimento di Reggio Emilia.
La merce, anche se venduta franco destino e trasportata con mezzi di Tecflam S.r.l., viaggia sempre a totale rischio e pericolo del Commit-
tente. Ci anche qualora sia spedita con corriere scelto da Tecflam S.r.l. Il Committente dovr fare, al momento del ritiro, le opportune verifi-
che e gli eventuali reclami entro 15 giorni dalla data della bolla di consegna. Eventuali coperture assicurative contro i rischi di trasporto si ef-
fettuano solo su specifica richiesta del Committente e a totale suo carico.
5. Collaudo Il Committente, prima di ricevere la consegna della merce, ha diritto di collaudare lopera compiuta. Tecflam S.r.l. deve mettere in
condizione il Committente di poter eseguire il collaudo.
Per collaudo si devono intendere le operazioni qui di seguito elencate:
a) collegamenti elettrici, a condizione che il punto terminale della linea elettrica a 220 o a 380 Volt sia stato posto in posizione tale consen-
tire il collegamento al quadro di comando del bruciatore gi montato sul generatore. La morsettiera di cui dotato il quadro comando
bruciatore, deve disporre di una linea elettrica trifase + neutro + terra (220 V), protetta da un interruttore non automatico disposto nel
locale caldaia e di conduttori facenti parte dei dispositivi di sicurezza e controllo (termostati, pressostati, magnetrol, ecc.);
b) accensione e regolazione del bruciatore, prova di combustione, a condizione che siano gi stati fatti i controlli della presenza del com-
bustibile liquido in cisterna o di quello gassoso in rete e della possibilit di erogare la potenza al collaudo.
Effettuato il collaudo con esito favorevole, la fornitura si intender dal Committente accettata, subordinatamente alla garanzia di Tecflam
S.r.l., di cui alla condizione n. 14.
Se, nonostante linvito fattogli da Tecflam S.r.l., il Committente tralascia di procedere al collaudo senza giusti motivi, ovvero non ne comunica
il risultato entro il termine di cinque giorni lavorativi, lopera si considera accettata. Se il Committente riceve senza riserve la consegna
dellopera, questa si considera accettata ancorch non si sia proceduto al collaudo.
Se al collaudo risulta che la fornitura non corrisponde alle caratteristiche essenziali stabilite in contratto e Tecflam S.r.l. non in grado di a-
dempiervi, essa ha il diritto di rinunciare allordinazione con il solo obbligo di riprendersi i materiali gi consegnati, restituendo la somma rice-
vuta, o sostituendo la fornitura con altra perfettamente funzionante e collaudabile, senza che il Committente possa reclamare indennizzi o ri-
sarcimenti per eventuali danni riportati.
6. Pagamenti Limpianto viene eseguito dietro il corrispettivo indicato in ordine/conferma.
In mancanza di diverse pattuizioni, i pagamenti dovranno essere eseguiti per contanti al momento della consegna della merce presso la sede
di Tecflam S.r.l. o prima della spedizione stessa.
Resta sempre a rischio del Committente la trasmissione di somme, qualunque sia il mezzo prescelto. Il rilascio di cambiali, tratte o qualsiasi
forma di pagamento da parte del Committente non comporta novazione n del contratto n di alcuna delle clausole contrattuali, senza spo-
stamento alcuno del luogo ove deve essere adempiuta lobbligazione; tali modalit di pagamento sono intese esclusivamente a facilitare la
definizione del rapporto.
I pagamenti sono dovuti nei termini pattuiti anche nei casi di ritardo nellarrivo della merce, o di avarie o perdite parziali o totali verificatesi
durante il trasporto, nonch nel caso in cui le merci messe a disposizione del Committente presso Tecflam S.r.l. non vengano dal Committen-
te medesimo ritirate.
Il mancato o ritardato pagamento anche di una sola delle scadenze relative ad ordini precedenti gi eseguiti da Tecflam S.r.l. proscioglie
questultima da ogni ulteriore obbligo o responsabilit. Per nessun motivo ed a nessun titolo il Committente pu differire i pagamenti oltre le
scadenze pattuite. Sui pagamenti ritardati verranno conteggiati gli interessi al tasso ufficiale di sconto commerciale vigente.
7. Riserva di propriet La propriet della merce fornita si trasferisce al Committente solo a pagamento totalmente eseguito, permanendo ri-
serva di propriet a favore di Tecflam S.r.l. fino a quel momento.
8. Recesso - Sospensione Risoluzione - Tecflam S.r.l. ha facolt, in relazione alle proprie esigenze commerciali, di recedere unilateralmen-
te dal contratto, senza addebito alcuno, in deroga allart. 1373 c.c. anche nellipotesi in cui lo stesso abbia avuto un principio di esecuzione. E
sempre, in ogni caso, concessa a Tecflam S.r.l. facolt di sospendere lesecuzione, recedere dal contratto o dichiarare la debitrice decaduta
dal beneficio del termine delle eventuali dilazioni di pagamento concesse qualora, a suo insindacabile giudizio, venissero a mancare o risul-
tassero diminuite le garanzie di solvibilit del Committente e/o anche ai sensi dellart. 1461 c.c. per inadempimenti relativi a forniture prece-
denti.
9. Clausola penale - Qualora il Committente fosse inadempiente rispetto a pregresse forniture e, a fronte di ci, Tecflam S.r.l. recedesse dal
presente contratto, il primo dovr corrispondere alla seconda, a titolo di penale ed ai sensi dellart. 1382 c.c., una somma pari al 20% del
prezzo della merce ordinata, fatto sempre salvo il risarcimento di ulteriori danni e impregiudicato il diritto di Tecflam S.r.l. di agire giudizial-
mente per lintegrale adempimento del contratto.
10. Contestazioni o reclami - Qualsiasi contestazione o reclamo circa lesecuzione del contratto ed asseriti vizi della fornitura dovranno essere
comunicati a Tecflam S.r.l. da parte del Committente mediante raccomandata a/r, entro il termine di decadenza di 8 (otto) giorni dal ricevi-
mento della merce, pena la decadenza della garanzia di cui alla condizione n. 14. Eventuali contestazioni o reclami non legittimano mai la
sospensione o il ritardo nei pagamenti. Ogni azione ed eccezione del Committente dovr essere preceduta da atto di costituzione in mora, da
effettuarsi con lettera raccomandata a/r.
Eventuali reclami o contestazioni riguardanti una singola consegna di merce non esonerano il Committente dallobbligo di ritirare la restante
quantit di merce entro i limiti dellordinazione o dellimpegno. Nessun reclamo riguardante la qualit della merce potr essere fatto valere,
neppure in via di eccezione, in sede giudiziaria se non avr avuto luogo il regolare pagamento della merce alla quale il reclamo si riferisce.
Non saranno ammessi reclami relativi alla qualit della merce e/o alla conformit rispetto agli ordinativi, qualora dipendano da modifiche ap-
portate dallacquirente.
11. Restituzioni - Eventuali restituzioni di merce verranno accettate solo se previamente autorizzate per iscritto da Tecflam S.r.l. e sempre salvo
le verifiche della merce, con obbligo in ogni caso, per il Committente di effettuare i pagamenti nei termini e nei modi pattuiti. Le spese di tra-
sporto relative alla merce restituita ed eventualmente sostituita sono a carico del Committente, salvo si tratti di resi effettuati per cause da im-
putarsi a Tecflam S.r.l.
12. Clausola risolutiva espressa e vendita coattiva Ove il Committente non proceda al ritiro della merce, Tecflam S.r.l pu far dichiarare risol-
to il contratto, ai sensi dellart. 1456 c.c., ovvero far vendere la merce stessa a mezzo di ufficiale giudiziario nei modi e nelle forme di cui
allart. 1515 c.c., restando impregiudicata lazione per lintegrazione del prezzo e, in ogni caso, quella di risarcimento del danno.
13. Recesso del Committente Il Committente pu recedere dal contratto anche se stata iniziata lesecuzione dellopera, purch tenga in-
denne Tecflam S.r.l. delle spese sostenute, dei lavori eseguiti e del mancato guadagno.
14. Garanzia:
a) Tecflam S.r.l. garantisce la buona qualit dei materiali e limita la garanzia alla presenza di eventuali difformit e vizi originari di costru-
zione e al caso in cui lacquirente osservi integralmente le condizioni ed i termini di pagamento sottoscritti in ordine. Se lopera stata
accettata dallacquirente, la garanzia si intende limitata ai vizi non riconoscibili dal medesimo o a quelli che si dimostrassero essere stati
dolosamente taciuti da Tecflam S.r.l.
b) La garanzia operante per tutto il periodo di tempo corrispondente ai 12 (dodici) mesi successivi allemissione della bolla di consegna
o al documento di trasporto da parte di Tecflam S.r.l. Allo scadere del termine indicato, la garanzia decade automaticamente, anche nel
caso in cui i materiali non siano stati messi mai in servizio.
c) Non sono coperti da garanzia: i motori elettrici dei ventilatori e delle pompe e i componenti elettrici in genere; il collaudo ed ogni altra
prestazione dopera.
d) Ogni decisone sulla sostituibilit di materiale in garanzia deve essere sempre demandata al personale tecnico dipendente di Tecflam
S.r.l.
e) La sostituzione in garanzia pu avvenire solo successivamente alla restituzione presso la Sede di Tecflam S.r.l. del materiale contesta-
to, che dovr pervenire unitamente a una nota di accompagnamento dettagliata, indicante i motivi della restituzione e i difetti riscontrati
nel materiale stesso.
f) Qualora, per la natura della riparazione o sostituzione, lacquirente richiedesse specificamente un intervento del personale di Tecflam
S.r.l., le ore e le spese di viaggio, di soggiorno e di attivit lavorative, saranno a carico dellacquirente e verranno regolarmente fattura-
te.
g) Tecflam S.r.l. si riserva la propriet di tutte le parti eventualmente sostituite. Le parti riparate o nuovamente fornite sono ugualmente
consegnate franco stabilimento di Tecflam S.r.l.
h) La sostituzione delle parti non comporta alcun prolungamento o rinnovamento del periodo di garanzia.
i) Qualsiasi riparazione, manomissione da parte di personale non autorizzato o modifica effettuata senza espressa autorizzazione della
Sede, comporta la decadenza di ogni garanzia.
j) Lacquirente, accettando le condizioni contrattuali e di garanzia proposte da Tecflam S.r.l., rinuncia ad ogni possibile richiesta di risar-
cimento o di indennizzo per spese subite in seguito a sinistri, danni diretti o indiretti, per mancati utili nel caso di inoperosit e di conte-
stazione del funzionamento del materiale fornito, qualora anche gli apparecchi contestati siano stati gratuitamente rimessi in stato di re-
golare funzionamento da Tecflam S.r.l. stessa. Il reclamo non potr inoltre mai dare luogo allannullamento o riduzione di eventuali or-
dini in corso, n a riduzioni di prezzo o risoluzioni di contratto da parte dellacquirente.
15. Controversie e Foro competente- Ogni controversia derivante dal presente contratto verr deferita allesclusiva competenza dellAutorit
Giudiziaria del Foro di Reggio Emilia.
16. Legge sulla Privacy Con il medesimo ordine il Committente presta anche il proprio consenso alla comunicazione e al conseguente tratta-
mento dei suoi dati personali ex D.Lgs. n. 196/2003 Codice in materia di protezione dei dati personali.
Tecflam Srl
DUTTO 16320
2 020026 BURNER T 25 GM POT. 2470 kW - 253 NM3/H NR 1,00
SERIAL NUMBER 15.16320.001,

NATURAL GAS 1 bar
1 AZ010 ACTUATOR SKP15.000E2 1STAGE SIEMENS NR 1,0000

2 AZ020 ACTUATOR SKP25.003E2 1STAGE WITH GOVERNOR NR 1,0000
3 CA039/01 INSULATOR CA039 NR 4,0000
4 PP012/01 BRASS INSERT NR 4,0000
5 PP012 PORCELAIN CONNECTOR PLUG STRAIGHT NR 4,0000
6 CV009 HIGH TENSION ELECTRICAL CABLE IN COPPER WITH RED SILICONE MT 4,0000
7 CA040 SPARK PLUG CAST WITH WIRE INOXD.2.6 NR 2,0000
8 CA040/50 DOMED NIPPLE WITH M3 THROUGH HOLE THREAD NR 2,0000
9 FM050 GAS FILTER 2" MADAS P MAX 6 bar NR 1,0000
10 FO010 PHOTOCELL QRA2 (1) X GAS NR 1,0000
11 GA060 ANTI-VIBRATION JOINT 2" GIULIANI ANELLO NR 1,0000
12 GW010 PRESSURE SWITCH GW10A6 DUNGS 2-10 mbar EX A4 NR 1,0000
13 GW150 PRESSURE SWITCH GW150A6 DUNGS 10-150 mBAR EX A4 NR 2,0000
14 GW500 PRESSURE SWITCH GW500A6 DUNGS 100-500 mbar EX A4 NR 2,0000
15 KI010 KIT FOR VF WITH MF4000 NR 1,0000
16 MN020 MANOMETER GAS D.63 0-250 mbar ATT. 1/4" RADIAL NR 1,0000
17 MN002 MANOMETER GAS D.100 0-10 BAR ATT.1/2" RAD RFM 1,6RB100 NR 1,0000
18 MN001 MANOMETER GAS D.100 0-06 BAR 1/2" NR 1,0000
19 PR020 BURNER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM LFL1.333 SIEMENS NR 1,0000
20 QE000055 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANEL NR 1,0000
21 RF015 GAS GOVERNOR WITH FILTER FGDR15 NR 1,0000
22 ML010 VIOLET SPRING FGDR-FG1B 15-20-25 Pu 25-80 mbar NR 1,0000
23 RU010 PUSH BUTTON TAP FOR GAS PRESSURE 1/4" P.MAX 5 BAR NR 1,0000
24 SE010 SERVOMOTOR M9484F1057-U REPLACES M9484F1049 NR 1,0000
25 TR101 TRANFORMER 50017460-00124V-110V-220V HONEYWELL NR 1,0000
26 AD500 ADAPTOR Q7230A1005 4-20 mA2-10V FOR SERVOMOTOR HONEYWELL NR 1,0000
27 TR007/01 TRANSFORMER TRK2 COFI2 POLES 220V WITH CABLE L.5MT NR 1,0000
28 VE1041 DOUBLE GAS VALVES DN40 SIEMENS VGD20.4011 NR 1,0000
29 KI043 FLANGE AGF10.10.40 1" 1/2 AGA41 NR 2,0000
30 VE4015B SOLENOID VALVE VE4015B1004 HONEYWELL NR 2,0000
31 VF5040B BUTTERFLY VALVE VF5040R3008 DN32 NR 1,0000
32 VS020/01 MANUAL GAS VALVE 1/2" M/F NR 1,0000
33 VS070 MANUAL GAS VALVE 2" PROFESSIONALE THREADED NR 1,0000
34 ZO010 TERMINAL FOR LFLAGM410490550 LANDYS NR 1,0000
35 ZO022 TERMINAL FOR LDU AGM11 SIEMENS NR 1,0000
36 RU010/10 PUSH BUTTON ATT.1/2" DKP NR 2,0000
37 RI026/01 PRESSURE REGULATOR ALFA40MPWITH BLC30 DN40 NR 1,0000
38 VO004 RELIEF VALVE VS4 MP CALIBRATED NR 1,0000
39 VJ013 SOLENOID VALVE 3 WAY CAMOZZI NC 1/8" NR 1,0000
7 643
On / off On / off On / off On / off

with constant pressure with differential pressure with pressure ratio
governor governor controller
SKP15... SKP25... SKP55... SKP75...
Actuators for SKPx5...

Gas Valves
ON / OFF safety shutoff feature conforming to EN 161 in connection with gas
and air valves from Siemens
Damped opening (rapid closing)
Very low power consumption
Suitable for gases of gas families I...III
Optionally with / without end switch (factory set)
Plug-in connection facility
Electrical indication of operation
Stroke indication
Supplementary Data Sheets (refer to Data Sheets on gas and air valves)
The SKPx5... and this Data Sheet are intended for use by OEMs which integrate
the actuators in their products.
CC1N7643en
Siemens Building Technologies
11.01.2005 HVAC Products
Use
The SKP... are designed for use with the following types of valves:
Type of valve Medium Data Sheet
VGG... Natural gas N7636
VGF... Gases of gas families I...III
VGH...
VGD2... Natural gas N7631
VGD4... Gases of gas families I...III
VRF... Biogas N7633
VRH... (used with SKPx5..., on
request)
VLF... Hot air N7637
SKP... in general The combination of actuator and valve provides the following functions:
- Safety shutoff valve (SKP15...)
- Safety shutoff valve with gas pressure governor / controller (SKP25..., SKP55...,
and SKP75...)
The electrohydraulic SKP... actuators together with the valves are designed for use with
gases of gas families I...III and air. They are used primarily on gas-fired combustion
plant. The actuators open slowly and close rapidly. They can be combined with any of
the above mentioned valve types and nominal sizes. The actuator can be supplied with
end switch (for indicating the fully closed position).
For information about valve sizing, refer to the Valve sizing chart in the Data Sheet of
the relevant valve.
SKP25... The SKP25... operates as a constant pressure governor with a setpoint spring.
Its field of use are primarily forced draft gas burners

- with mechanical fuel / air ratio control
- with electronic fuel / air ratio control
SKP55... The SKP55... operates as a differential pressure governor.
Its field of use are primarily

- combustion plant with combined heat recovery systems
- plant where pressure conditions in the burner and in the combustion chamber do
not change in proportion to load changes
- burners with adjustable fuel / air mixing devices in the burner head
- plant with negative pressure levels on the gas or air side
SKP75... The SKP75... operates as a ratio controller and provides control of the gas pressure
depending on the pressure of the combustion air, ensuring that the gas / air ratio re-
mains constant across the entire load range.
Its field of use are primarily modulating forced draft gas burners.
2/25
Siemens Building Technologies CC1N7643en

HVAC Products 11.01.2005
Warning notes
To prevent injury to persons, damage to property or the environment, the follow-
ing warning notes should be observed!
Do not open, interfere with or modify the actuators!
All activities (mounting, installation and service work, etc.) must be performed by
qualified staff
Check to ensure that the impulse pipes are properly fitted and tight
Fall or shock can adversely affect the safety functions. Such actuators must not be
put into operation, even if they do not exhibit any damage
If mains voltage is fed to the end switch via the second plug-in space, protective
earth must be connected to the actuator via the same plug
Use of connectors conforming to DIN EN 175301-803-A is mandatory
The connectors used must have cable strain relief
The pumps stem may not be pulled
out using the overstroke element
since that part could become loose
7643z17e/0404
Do not pull here!
SKP15... / SKP25... SKP15... SKP25...

with connecting cable
AGA62.000A000
Position Position
valve1 valve 2
7643z28e/1203
VGD40...
Plug-in space without collar

(end switch / CPI)
AGA64 AGA65
For connection of end switch,

a connector with collar should be used
(protection against electric shock hazard),
refer to "Accessories"!
Plug-in space with collar

(power supply) 7643z14e/0105
3/25

Engineering notes
Design of the If the available gas pressure exceeds the maximum permissible operating pressure of
gas train the valve / SKP... (refer to the Data Sheet of the relevant valve), it must be lowered by
an upstream pressure controller. The pressure switch for lack of gas must always be
fitted upstream of the gas valve when used in connection with the SKP The inside
diameter of the impulse pipes must be a minimum of 6 mm.
SKP25..., SKP55..., The impulse pipes must be installed such that the differential pressure can be acquired
SKP75... with no disturbance (unfavorable flow conditions). Pressure test points must not pro-
trude and be flush with the inside diameter of the pipe or duct wall. The impulse lines to
the governor / controller should be as short as possible, enabling the governor / control-
ler to respond quickly should sudden load changes occur.
SKP75... Installation of impulse pipes

In the case of unsafe combustion chamber pressure pipes (e.g. resulting from po-
tential leaks), the setting must also be checked during operation without having the
combustion chamber pipe connected, especially with respect to maximum burner
capacity. The impulse pipes must be fitted such that the differential pressure can
be acquired with no disturbance. With gas / air ratios > 3, the impulse pipes for the
combustion air and the combustion chamber pressure must have an inside diame-
ter of at least 8 mm. The impulse pipe for the combustion chamber pressure must
be fitted such that the gases will cool down in the vicinity of the impulse pipe and
condensing gases cannot enter the controller but will return to the combustion
chamber.
Recommendations:
The gas pressure should be acquired at a distance of 5 times the nominal pipe
size downstream from the valve
Do not use the lateral test points on the VG... valve body for picking up the pres-
sure
Considering the combustion chamber pressure

If the resistance value of the combustion chamber / heat exchanger / stack system
is constant, the combustion chamber pressure changes in proportion to the gas
and combustion air pressure as the burners output changes. In that case, the
combustion chamber pressure need not be fed to the SKP75... as a disturbance
variable. However, if the combustion chamber pressure does not change to the
same extent as the gas and air pressure as this is the case in plants with flue gas
fan or modulating flue gas damper the combustion chamber pressure must be
fed to the SKP75... as a disturbance variable, enabling the controller to counteract.
Mounting notes
Ensure that the relevant national safety regulations are complied with
The quadratic arrangement of the fixing holes allows the actuator to be fitted in 4
different positions, each step being 90
The actuator can be mounted or replaced while the system is under pressure; seal-
ing materials are not required
Follow the Mounting Instructions included with the actuators:
- For SKP15...: M7643
- For SKP25...: M7643.1
- For SKP55...: M7643.2
- For SKP75...: M7643.3
4/25

Installation and commissioning notes
SKP... in general Electrical commissioning may only be performed when the SKP is fitted to the
valve; otherwise, the SKP can be damaged
Power is supplied and connection of the end switch is made directly via a connect-
ing cable (conforming to DIN EN 175301-803-A)
The end switch is factory set
Functioning principle When power is applied, the pump will be activated and the control valve closed. Oil is
of 1-stage actuator with now pumped from the chamber below the piston to the pressure chamber above the
safety shutoff feature piston. The oil pressure causes the piston to move downward, thereby opening the
valve against the pressure of the closing spring. The pump remains energized until
the closing command is given. When power is removed, or in the event of a power
failure, the pump will be deactivated and the control valve opened so that the closing
spring pushes the piston back. The return flow system is sized such that the counter-
stroke required for reaching the fully closed position is completed within about 0.6 sec-
onds.
SKP15... complete (Schematic drawing)

with valve
4 Legend
1 Piston
1 2 Oscillating pump
SKP15...
3 Oil reservoir
2
4 Pressure chamber
7 5 Stem
6 Closing spring
7 Control valve
8 End switch (optional)
3
5
8
7643z29/0304
VG.../VL.../VR...
pE
5/25

Installation and commissioning notes (contd)
SKP2..., SKP5... and SKP7... control a bypass valve via their pneumatic controller,
thereby opening the VG gas valve.
with valve
D am ping A G A 25 Legend
(optional)
P G as 4 1 Piston
Air
O nly S K P 25.3...: 2 Oscillating pump
A ir connection P L 3 Oil reservoir
1 4 Pressure chamber
5 Stem
10 6 Valves closing spring
7 Control valve
9 8 End switch (optional)
2
9 Spring (setpoint adjust-
S K P 25.... 7 ment)
10 Ball valve
3
8
> 6 mm
V G .../V L.../V R ...
m in. 5d
pE
7643z30e/1204
SKP25... The setpoint adjustment PGas must be made manually by turning the adjusting screw
that acts on the setpoint spring (for setpoint springs, refer to Accessories).
PGas Legend
Pe Inlet pressure
V Volumetric flow
PGas 0...22 mbar (with mounted
standard spring)
t (Pe; V)
7643d03/0503
SKP25.3... The SKP25.3... operates based on the zero governor principle (PL : PG = 1:1).
By feeding fan pressure PL to the air inlet, gas pressure PGas follows with a fixed
1-to-1 ratio.
PGas A Gas / air ratio for stoichiometric
C
combustion
A B At low-fire, the parallel displace-
ment of the working characteri-
B stic produces a larger amount of
excess air in percent. The zero
governor permits a parallel dis-
PGas +
- 1 mbar
placement in both directions,
towards Excess air B and
Lack of air C
PAir
7643d04e/0105
6/25

SKP25.4... The SKP25.4... is suited for the control of higher pressures.

Standard spring 0...1,500 mbar.
SKP25.4... complete (Schematic drawing)

with valve
4 Legend
Luft / Air PGas
1 Piston
3 Oil reservoir
4 Pressure side
10 5 Stem
6 Valves closing spring
9
2 7 Control valve
SKP25.4....
9 Spring (setpoint adjustment)
10 Ball valve
3
8
> 6 mm
VG.../VL.../VR...
min. 5d
pE
7643z34/1204
SKP25.4... Setpoint adjustment PGas is made manually by turning the adjusting screw which
acts on the setpoint spring (for setpoint springs, also refer to Accessories).
PGas Legend
Pe Inlet pressure
V Volumetric flow
PGas 0...1,500 mbar
t (Pe; V) (with built-in standard spring)
7643d09/1204
7/25


with valve
Legend
PGas
Luft / Air
1 Piston
3 Oil reservoir
1 4 Pressure chamber
5 Stem
9 6 Valves closing spring
2 7 Control valve
7
9 Spring (setpoint adjustment)
10 Ball valve (bypass)
SKP55... 3
8 5
> 6 mm
VG.../VL.../VR...
min. 5d
pE
6
7643z32/0304
VG / PG Example:
Adjusted gas / air ratio for burner operation
1+ with excess gas 1+ . The percentage of
excess air is constant across the entire
load range. Gas / air ratio adjustment with
the adjustable orifice on the gas side (see
position k).
9
1-
7643d01/1004
VL / PL
Legend VL Volumetric air flow

VG Volumetric gas flow
8/25

M pL A
Air
8
VL 11
SKP55.../V... 3 - +2
1 +
B B
7643z01e/1204
5+ - 4
Gas 7
10 VG
pG
9
Safety notes:
Air damper j / orifice 11 must always be located as shown, that is, orifice
11 must be installed downstream from the air damper j.
Gas valve 10 (VG...) / orifice k must always be located as shown, that is,
orifice k must be installed downstream from the gas valve 10 .
4 3 5 c Adjustment of parallel displace-
ment of working characteristic
7643z12/1204
* Check combustion values

with cap fitted
2
d Test point for air pressure (+)
e Test point for air pressure (-)

1
f Test point for gas pressure (-)
g Test point for gas pressure (+)
12 h Stroke indication
i Spring (parallel displacement)
6
j Actuating device (air)
k Orifice (gas)
10 10 VG... gas valve
11 Orifice (air)
12 Indication of operating state (LED)
Legend pG Differential pressure across orifice on the gas side

pL Differential pressure across orifice on the air side
A Air heating coil (recuperator)
B Burner
M Actuator
9/25

Adjustment of governor on modulating burners prior to startup:

- The adjusting screw c on the SKP55... should be set to a gas / air ratio curve
which passes through the neutral point. The SKP55... is supplied with that fac-
tory setting.
Adjustment in the field can be made as follows:
Note:
Fit cap again before measuring the combustion value and after the setting is
made.
Turn adjusting screw c in counterclockwise direction until spring i is com-
pletely loose. Shut off the gas supply upstream of the SKP55... Switch on the
SKP55... Turn adjusting screw c in clockwise direction until valve opens
- Bring the adjustable orifice k to the precalculated value. That value with the
same pressure differential on the air and gas side must lead to practically stoi-
chiometric combustion
- Start the burner and run it to about 90 % of the nominal load
- Measure the combustion quality and make adjustments of the flow rate with the
adjustable orifice k until optimum measured values are reached (fine adjust-
ment)
- Return to low-fire operation. Check the combustion and readjust if necessary
the position of the working characteristic with the setting screw c on the
SKP55... until optimum measured values are reached. Clockwise rotation
more gas. Counterclockwise rotation less gas, that is, parallel displacement
of the working characteristic towards lack of air or excess air
- Limit the air damper j for low-fire operation
- If a significant parallel displacement of the working characteristic was required,
the setting must be checked again at 90 % of the nominal load and then read-
justed, if required
- Run the burner to the predefined nominal load with the help of the air damper
j and limit the actuator position for that load
- Check the flue gas values at a few positions of the load range. Make readjust-
ments in the nominal load range with the adjustable orifice k, and in the low-
fire range with screw c on the governor of the SKP55...
10/25


with valve
Legend
PGas
1 Piston
Luft / Air
4
2 Oscillating pump
3 Oil reservoir
4 Pressure chamber
SKP75...
1
5 Stem
6 Valves closing spring
7 Control valve
7
5
8
> 6 mm
VG.../VL.../VR...
min. 5d
pE
7643z33/0304
6
Adjustment of the gov- Use setting screw c / PGAS / PAIR to set the gas / air ratio to the required
ernor on modulating value (coarse setting) and the scale with setting screw d to zero (refer to
burners fig. 7643z03)
Start the burner and run it to about 90 % of the nominal load
Measure the CO2 or O2 content of the flue gases and optimize the adjustment with
setting screw c / PGAS / PAIR (refer to fig. 7643z03)
Return to low-fire operation, check the CO2 or O2 content of the flue gases. If nec-
essary, readjust position of the working characteristic with setting screw d/
until optimum measured values are attained
Limit the air damper position for low-fire operation
Meaning of setting screw markings:

+ more gas
- less gas
11/25

If a significant parallel displacement of the working characteristic was required to obtain

optimum CO2 or O2 values in low-fire operation, the adjustment of the pressure ratio at
nominal load or 90 % of the nominal load must be checked again and readjusted, if
required.
Run the burner to the required output and limit the nominal load air damper position
Check the flue gas values at various positions of the load range
If readjustments are required:

- Use setting screw c / PGAS / PAIR in the nominal load range
- Use setting screw d/ to make parallel displacements of the characteristic in
the flow-fire range
If the gas / air pressure ratio lies outside the setting range, an orifice in the gas or air
flow can be used to adjust the pressure at the test points on the burner side. Prerequi-
site is that there is a sufficient gas or air pressure reserve on the inlet side.
PGas
C
M B
~
pA A
pC
M B
C
pA
SKP75... 0,4
1 PLuft
9 7643d07/0503
-
2
+
pE pG
7643z03/0304
VG...
c Setting and display of the gas / air ratio 3
d Setting and display of parallel displacement of the

working characteristic 5
4
e Test point for combustion chamber pressure
f Test point for air pressure

1 2
g Test point for gas pressure
h Stroke indication
i Operation indicator (LED) 6
j Gas valve VG... 7

7643z16/1003
12/25

Function If the air pressure exceeds the maximum value of
30 mbar with a PGas / PAir ratio of 2

50 mbar with a PGas / PAir ratio of 2
permitted for the governor, the pressure must be lowered with a reducing T-piece
AGA78 (also refer to Technical data).
P1 Example:
p1 = 70 mbar
130 D1 = 1.5 mm
120 D2 = 1.7 mm
110
m
100 m Wanted: Air pressure signal p2 for
2
=
90 2 the SKP75...
;D
m p2 = 26 mbar
80 m mm
5
1, 1 ,7
70 = 2=
D1 m;
D
60 m
= 1,5
50 D1
7643d02/0503
40
30
20
10
10 20 30 P2
Air is continuously vented to atmosphere via orifice D2. The pressure of the following
medium will be reduced via throttle D1. The illustration below shows the correlations.
p1
AGA78
P1 D1 Burner
D1
M
P2 "Air"/SKP7...
p2
D2
7643z02e/1003
D2
The reducing T-piece AGA78 is supplied ready for mounting, with D1 = 1.5 mm and
D2 = 1.7 mm.
D2 with a diameter of 2 mm is included as a loose item.
13/25

Standards and certificates
ISO 9001: 2000 ISO 14001: 1996

Cert. 00739 Cert. 38233
In connection with Conformity to EEC directives

VG... valves Electromagnetic compatibility EMC (immunity) 89 / 336 EEC
Directive for gas appliances 90 / 396 EEC
Directive for pressure devices 93 / 23 EEC
Service notes
Make the safety test according to Commissioning notes
Disposal notes
The actuator contains electrical and electronic components and hydraulic oil and may
not be disposed of together with domestic waste.
Local and currently valid legislation must be observed.
Type summary (other types of actuators on request)

The complete gas shutoff assembly or pressure governor / controller assembly consists
of actuator and valve.
SKP15... Mains voltage AC 100...110 V AC 220...240 V

1-stage opening and closing, without end switch SKP15.000E1 SKP15.000E2
1-stage opening and closing, with end switch SKP15.001E1 SKP15.001E2
SKP25... 1-stage opening and closing, without end switch, with SKP25.003E1 SKP25.003E2
pressure governor up to 22 mbar
1-stage opening and closing, with end switch, with pres- SKP25.001E1 SKP25.001E2
sure governor up to 22 mbar
1-stage opening and closing, without end switch, zero SKP25.303E1 SKP25.303E2
governor version
1-stage opening and closing, without end switch, with SKP25.403E1 SKP25.403E2
pressure governor up to 1,500 mbar, high-pressure ver-
sion
1-stage opening and closing, with end switch, with pres- SKP25.401E1 ) SKP25.401E2 )
sure governor up to 1,500 mbar, high-pressure version
) On request
differential pressure governor
1-stage opening and closing, with end switch, with differ- SKP55.001E1 SKP55.001E2
ential pressure governor
pressure ratio controller
1-stage opening and closing, with end switch, with pres- SKP75.001E1 SKP75.001E2
sure ratio controller
1-stage opening and closing, without end switch, with SKP75.503E1 SKP75.503E2
pressure ratio controller, with greater parallel displace-
ment
1-stage opening and closing, with end switch, with pres- SKP75.501E1 ---
sure ratio controller, with greater parallel displacement
14/25

Ordering examples
When ordering, please give the complete type reference of the actuator (refer to Type
summary). All products must be ordered as separate items.
Example of SKP15... Actuator

- On / off
- With end switch
- For AC 230 V / 50 Hz SKP15.001E2
Connector valve actuator (plug) AGA64
Connector end switch (plug) AGA65
The complete gas valve shutoff pressure governor assembly consists of actuator and
valve. Please order the required valves as separate items (refer to the relevant Data
Sheets). Actuator and valve are supplied unassembled. Assembly is very straightfor-
ward and wird vorzugsweise am Brenner vorgenommen.
Complete combination of actuator / valve consisting of:

- VG... gas valve
- SKP15.001E2 actuator
- Accessories
Example of SKP25... Gas pressure governor with safety shutoff feature:

- Without end switch SKP25.003E2
- For AC 230 V / 50 Hz
Connector valve actuator (plug) AGA64
Combination of gas pressure governor / valve consisting of:

- VG... gas valves (refer to Data Sheets N7636 and N7631)
- SKP25.003E2 actuator
- Accessories, e.g. AGA25 (damping throttle)
15/25

Accessories (not supplied as standard, to be ordered as separate items)
Connecting cable with plugs AGA62.000A000
- For powering both SKPs on the double valve (VGD...)
with connector (AGA64)
Connector for valve actuator (power supply) AGA64

- Plug-in connector conforming to DIN EN 175301-803-A
- Triple pole +
- 6...9 mm dia. / max. 1.5 mm
Connector for end switch AGA65

- Plug-in connector conforming to DIN EN 175301-803-A
- Triple pole +
- 4.5...11 mm dia. / max. 1.5 mm
Setpoint spring (yellow) for SKP25... AGA22

- Optional to standard spring (0...22 mbar)
- 15...120 mbar
- Standard spring in SKP25.4...
Setpoint spring (red) for SKP25... AGA23

- 100...250 mbar
- 0...1,500 mbar with SKP25.4... (optional to AGA22)
Setpoint spring (unpainted) for SKP25.3... and SKP55... AGA28

- 1.5 mbar
Setpoint spring (unpainted) for SKP25... AGA29

- 0...22 mbar
Damping throttle for SKP25... AGA25

- Optional
Damping throttle for SKP55... AGA75

- Optional, pipe connection for 8 mm dia.
- Refer to Mounting Instructions 4 319 2078 0
Damping throttle for SKP55... AGA75E

- Optional
(Same as AGA75 but with threaded connection on both sides)
Pressure reducing-T-piece for SKP75... AGA78

- Optional
16/25

Technical data
General device data Mains voltage AC 220 V 15 %...AC 240 V +10 %
AC 100 V 15 %...AC 110 V +10 %
Mains frequency 50...60 Hz 6 %
Power consumption max. 13.5 VA
End switch (if fitted) factory set as closed position switch valve
fully closed
- Switching capacity 4 (2 A, cos = 0.3)
On time 100 %
Opening time for full stroke 6...10 s (depending on nominal valve size,
longer opening times below 0 C)
Opening speed approx. 2 mm / s
Closing time < 0.8 s (in the event of power failure)
Perm. mounting positions
7643z07/0603
always with the diaphragms in the vertical

position
Degree of protection IP 54
only ensured when central screw at the
connector is tightened
Stroke max. 26 mm (valve limits max. stroke)
Weight
- SKP15... approx. 1.1 kg
Perm. media depending on the type of valve
Medium inlet pressure PE depending on the type of valve
Perm. medium temperature depending on the type of valve
Flow rate depending on the type of valve
Perm. test pressure PG 1,000 mbar
Perm. underpressure PG 200 mbar
17/25

Technical data (contd)
Environmental Storage DIN EN 60 721-3-1

conditions Climatic conditions class 1K3
Mechanical conditions class 1M2
Temperature range -20...+60 C
Humidity < 95 % r.h.
Transport DIN EN 60 721-3-2
Climatic conditions class 2K2
Operation DIN EN 60 721-3-3
(longer opening times below 0 C)
Condensation, formation of ice and ingress of water are not permitted!
SKP25... Setpoint range of outlet pressure 0.5...250 mbar

(3 setpoint springs, refer to Accessories)
Control class A to DIN EN 88
Setting range (setpoint) max. 250 mbar (gas pressure)
Control group III to DIN 3392
SKP25.3 Combustion air pressure max. 50 mbar

Zero governor to EN 12067-1
Compensating variable differential pressure of combustion air
0.5 mbar
Differential pressure ratio (gas / air) 1:1
Parallel displacement PGas 1 mbar
SKP55... Differential pressure ratio (gas / air) 1:1

Perm. differential pressure the controller 0.3...200 mbar
may be subjected to during operation
Control accuracy < 10 % at pmin
< 1 % at pmax
Parallel displacement of working
characteristic
- Excess gas 1 mbar
- Excess air 1 mbar
Compensating variable differential pressure of combustion air
0.3 mbar
Interval required for load change via air min. 5 s (depending on valve stroke)
damper, from high-fire to low-fire
18/25

Technical data (contd)
SKP75... Control accuracy < 10 % at pmin

< 2 % at pmax
Control group III to DIN 3392
Control variable Gas pressure differential pressure PG-PF or PG-PAir
min. 0.8 mbar
max. 120 mbar
Control class A to DIN EN 88
Compensating variable differential pressure of combustion
air (across burner baffle plate PAir
Pcombustion chamber)
0.5 mbar
Air pressure at PGas/PAir
-2 max. 30 mbar
-2 max. 50 mbar
- for higher pressures, see AGA78 max. 150 mbar
(accessory)
Setting range pressure ratio refer to Type summary
- Pgas / PAir 0.4...9
Parallel displacement of working
characteristic
- Excess gas 1 mbar
- Excess air 1 mbar
- Excess with SKP75.5... 4.5 mbar
Perm. combustion chamber pressure depending on the controlled variable gas
pressure PG
Recommended distance impulse pipe con- min. 5 x nominal valve size at a location
nection from valve where there is no turbulence
Inlet pressure same as valve
Perm. test pressure PG 1 bar
Perm. underpressure PG 200 mbar
Interval required for load change via air min. 5 s (depending on valve stroke)
damper, from high-fire to low-fire
Motorized setpoint Mains voltage (control voltage) AC 220 V 15 %...AC 240 V +10 %
adjuster SQS27... depending on type AC 100 V 15 %...AC 110 V +10 %
Connecting cable length 1.5 m
Power consumption 1.3 VA
Running time twom max. 75 s (refer to Type summary)
Degree of protection IP 40 (to be ensured through mounting)
Safety class III to VDE 0631
Contact assignment device connector

7643z10/0903
1 2
3
3
2
Valve closed
1
Valve actuator End switch
Connector AGA64 Connector AGA65
DIN EN 175301-803-A DIN EN 175301-803-A
double pole + triple pole +
19/25

Dimensions
Dimensions in mm
SKP15... actuators
188
7643m02e/1204
Hexagon socket A/F4 83

9
15.8
M5 18.3
30.5
Device connector Detail X

valve actuator to
74
87
DIN EN 175301-803 Device connector end switch to

design A, double pole + DIN EN 175301-803
design A, triple pole
74
9
86
64
M3 Tightening torque
18 central fixing screw 0.4 Nm
20/25

Dimensions (contd)
Dimensions in mm
SKP25.0... / SKP25.3...
actuators
96,2
32,5
Rp1/4
Rp1/4
Pressure nozzle
221
202
200
X
188
168
Hexagon socket A/F4 83
9
7643m08e/1204
15,8
M5
86 18,3
64
Device connector
valve actuator to 30,5
74 DIN EN 175301-803 6,3
design A, double pole + Detail X
Device connector end switch to

DIN EN 175301-803
design A, triple pole +
106
87
74
9
4,8
98
141 Tightening torque
central fixing screw 0.4 Nm
M3
18
21/25

Dimensions (contd)
Dimensions in mm
SKP25.4... actuators
71,7
32,5 Rp1/4
Rp1/4
Pressure nozzle
220,8
207,3
201,8
187,6
167,8
Hexagon socket A/F4
83
9
7643m07e/1204
M5 15,8
86 18,3
74 30,5
Device connector
valve actuator to Detail X
DIN EN 175301-803
design A, double pole + Device connector end switch to
DIN EN 175301-803
106
87
74

9
64
105,1
M3 Tightening torque
148
18 central fixing screw 0.4 Nm
22/25

Dimensions (contd)
Dimensions in mm
SKP55...
92,7
58,2
32,5 50
Rp1/4
Rp1/4 +Air ATMOSPHERE
Pressure nozzle
233
207
202 X
168
188
83
Hexagon socket A/F4

9
7643m09e/1204
M5 15,9
86 18,2
64
Device connector
valve actuator to
Rp1/4
DIN EN 175301-803
design A, double pole +
30,5
6,3
Detail X
106
87
74

DIN EN 175301-803
9
74
9
126
4,8
169
Tightening torque
M3
18
23/25

Dimensions (contd)
Dimensions in mm
SKP75...
58,4
32,5
Rp1/4
Rp1/4
Pressure nozzle
Rp1/4
242
269
X
203
188
188
83
Hexagon socket A/F4

9
7643m10e/1204
M5 15,8
86 18,3
64
30,5
Device connector 6,3
valve actuator to Detail X
DIN EN 175301-803
design A, double pole +
146

87
74
DIN EN 175301-803
9
74
4,8
126
169
Tightening torque
M3
18
24/25

Dimensions (contd)
Dimensions in mm
Connecting cable
AGA62.000A000 for
two SKP...
N
Contact designation
L2
PE
PE
1 2
2 1
L1 N
32
25
210 10
Tightening torque
L1
L2
PE
7643m01e/1204
N
Connection diagram
L1 L2 N PE
L1 N PE L2 N PE
2005 Siemens Building Technologies HVAC Products GmbH

Subject to change! 25/25

Capitolo - Chapter
FILTRO GAS TIPO FM - FMC - FGM - FF Chaptre - Capitulo
FM - FMC - FGM - FF GAS FILTERS
FILTRE DE GAZ TYPE FM - FMC - FGM - FF
FILTROS DE GAS SERIE FM - FMC - FGM - FF 24
FM - FMC - FGM - FF
0051
0497
DESCRIZIONE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION DESCRIPCIN
E un dispositivo che impedisce il passaggio It is a device that prevents the passage of Les filtres pour gaz liminent les particules Dispositivo que impide el paso de partculas
di particelle di polvere o detriti portati dal a particles of dust or debris brought by the de poussire portes par le gaz et protgent de polvo o impurezas contenidas en el gas,
gas proteggendo i dispositivi di regolazione gas, protecting the regulation and safety les lments en danger (brleurs, compteurs protegiendo as los dispositivos de regulacin
e sicurezza. device. et rgulateurs) dune obstruction rapide. y seguridad.
E' composto da una cartuccia filtrante FM gas filters have a large filtering component Filtre pour gaz est compos dune cartouche Es compuesto por un cartucho filtrante de
ampiamente dimensionata e realizzata in made of synthetical washable material which filtrante ralise en matriau synthtique material sinttico lavable y es completamente
materiale sintetico lavabile; completamente is fully removable for complete inspection lavable; il est compltement extractible pour extrable para una inspeccin y limpieza
estraibile per una totale ispezione e pulizia. and cleaning. linspection complte et le nettoyage. completas.
Ci notevolmente facilitato dalle tenute Special O-Ring sealings, resistant to third gas Cela est facilit par les joints dtanchit Estas operaciones son sumamente facilitadas
appositamente realizzate con anelli di tipo family, make easy removal. tout spcialement raliss avec des bagues por la presencia de juntas tricas, resistentes
O-Ring resistenti anche ai gas della terza de type joints toriques qui rsistent aussi aux tambin a los gases de la tercera familia.
famiglia. gaz de la troisime famille.
Ogni filtro MADAS consente la misurazione MADAS filters permits upstream pressure Chaque filtre MADAS permet le mesurage Es posible efectuar la medicin de la presin
della pressione a monte tramite un apposito measurement through an appropriate de la pression en haut grce une fixation en los puntos anteriores de la linea, a travs
attacco a norma. standard connection. spcisle. de una conexion expresamente provista
segn la norma.
Omologazione CE secondo EN 126 EC certified according to EN 126 Homologation CE selon EN 126 Homologacin CE segn EN 126
Conforme Direttiva 2009/142/CE In conformity with the 2009/142/EC Conforme la Directive 2009/142/CE Conforme Directiva 2009/142/CE
(Direttiva Gas) Directive (Gas Directive) (Directive Gaz) (Directiva Gas)
Conforme Direttiva 97/23/CE In conformity with the 97/23/EC Conforme la Directive 97/23/CE Conforme Directiva 97/23/CE
(Direttiva PED) Directive (PED Directive) (Directive PED) (Directiva PED)
Madas Technical Manual

FM - FGM 1
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter
Chaptre - Capitulo
FILTRO GAS TIPO FM - FMC - FGM - FF
24 FILTRE DE GAZ TYPE FM - FMC - FGM - FF

FILTROS DE GAS SERIE FM - FMC - FGM - FF
CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE TECHNICAL DATA CARACTERISTIQUES TECHNIQUES CARATTERISTICAS TECNICAS
Impiego: Use: Emploi: Utilizacin:

gas non aggressivi delle 3 famiglie not aggressive gases of the 3 families gaz non agressifs des trois familles gases de las 3 familias
(gas secchi) (dry gases) (gaz secs) (secos y no agresivos)
Attacchi filettati Rp: Threaded connections Rp: Fixations filetees Rp: Conexiones roscadas Rp:
(DN 15 DN 50) secondo EN 10226 (DN 15 DN 50) according to EN 10226 (DN 15 DN 50) selon EN 10226 (DN 15 DN 50) segn EN 10226
Attacchi flangiati PN 16: Flanged connections PN 16: Fixations bridees PN 16: Conexiones de brida PN 16:
(DN 65 DN 300) secondo ISO 7005 (DN 65 DN 300) according to ISO 7005 (DN 65 DN 300) selon ISO 7005 (DN 65 DN 300) segn ISO 7005
Su richiesta attacchi flangiati ANSI 150 On request ANSI 150 flanged connections Sur demande fixations bridees ANSI 150 A peticin conexiones de brida ANSI 150
Pressione max esercizio: Max. working pressure: Pression maximale en exercice: Max. presion ejercicio:
2 bar o 6 bar (vedere etichetta prodotto) 2 bar or 6 bar (see product label) 2 bar ou 6 bar (Voir tiquette du produit) 2 bar o 6 bar (ver etiqueta producto)
Temperatura ambiente: Environment temperature: Temprature ambiante: Temperatura ambiente:

-20 +70 C -20 +70 C -20 +70 C -20 +70 C
Gruppo: Group: Groupe: Grupo:

2 2 2 2
Filtraggio: Filtration: Filtrage: Filtracin:

50 m - 20 m - 10 m 50 m - 20 m - 10 m 50 m - 20 m - 10 m 50 m - 20 m - 10 m
MATERIALI MATERIALS MATRIELS MATERIALES
Alluminio pressofuso (UNI EN 1706) Die-cast aluminium (UNI EN 1706) Alluminium fond dans la masse Aluminio inyectado a presin
(UNI EN 1706) (UNI EN 1706)

ottone OT-58 (UNI EN 12164) OT-58 brass (UNI EN 12164) laiton OT-58 (UNI EN 12164) latn OT-58 (UNI EN 12164)

alluminio 11S (UNI 9002-5) 11S aluminium (UNI 9002-5) alluminium 11S (UNI 9002-5) aluminio 11S (UNI 9002-5)

acciaio zincato e acciaio INOX 430 F galvanized and 430 F stainless steel acier zingu et acier INOX 430 F acero inox 430 F y galvanizado
(UNI EN 10088) (UNI EN 10088) (UNI EN 10088) (UNI EN 10088)

gomma antiolio NBR (UNI 7702) NBR rubber (UNI 7702) caoutchou anti-huile NBR (UNI 7702) goma antiaceite NBR (UNI 7702)

nylon 30% fibra di vetro nylon 30% glass fibre nylon 30% fibre de verre nylon 30% fibra de vidrio
(UNI EN ISO 11667) (UNI EN ISO 11667) (UNI EN ISO 11667) (UNI EN ISO 11667)

viledon viledon viledon viledon
MODELLI MODELS MODELES VERSIONES
A = Senza prese di pressione o tappi A = Without pressure nipples or caps A = Sans prises de pression ou bouchons A = Sin tomas de presin o tapones
B = 1 Presa di pressione G 1/8" in entrata B = Inlet G 1/8" pressure nipple B = Prise de pression G 1/8" en entre B = 1 Toma de presin G 1/8" en entrada
D = Presa di pressione G 1/8" in entrata e uscita D = Inlet and outlet G 1/8" pressure nipple D = Prise de pression G 1/8" en entre/sortie D = Toma de presin G 1/8" en entrada/salida
F = 1 Tappo G 1/8" in entrata F = Inlet G 1/8" cap F = 1 Bouchon G 1/8" en entre F = 1 Tapn G 1/8" en entrada
H = Tappo G 1/8" in entrata e uscita H = Inlet and outlet G 1/8" cap H = Bouchon G 1/8" en entre/sortie H = Tapn G 1/8" en entrada/salida
I = 4 Tappi G 1/4" I = 4 G 1/4" caps I = 4 Bouchons G 1/4" I = 4 Tapones G 1/4"
L = 2 Prese di Pressione + 2 Tappi G 1/8" L = 2 G 1/8" pressure nipples and 2 G 1/8" caps L = 2 Prises de Pression + 2 Bouchons G 1/8" L = 2 Tomas de presin + 2 Tapones G 1/8"
M = Presa di pressione G 1/4" in entrata e uscita M = Inlet and outlet G 1/4" pressure nipple M = Prise de pression G 1/4" en entre/sortie M = Toma de presin G 1/4" en entrada/salida
N = 4 Prese di pressione G 1/4" N = 4 G 1/4" pressure nipples N = 4 Prises de pression G 1/4" N = 4 Tomas de presin G 1/4"
O = 2 Prese di Pressione + 2 Tappi G 1/4" O = 2 G 1/4" pressure nipples and 2 G 1/4" caps O = 2 Prises de pression + 2 Bouchons G 1/4" O = 2 Tomas de presin + 2 Tapones G 1/4"
J = Tappo G 1/4 in entrata e uscita J = Inlet and outlet G 1/4 cap J = Bouchon G 1/4" en entre/sortie J = Tapn G 1/8" en entrada/salida
2 FM - FGM
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter
Attacchi - Connections - Fixations - Conexiones
DN 65 - DN 80 - DN 100
DN 15 - DN 20 - DN 25
DN 15 - DN 20 - DN 25
DN 32 - DN 40 - DN 50
DN 25M * - DN 32
DN 25M * - DN 32
DN 200 - DN 300
DN 125 - DN 150
FMC COMPACT
DN 40 - DN 50
DN 40 - DN 50
Modello
Model
Modle
Versin
FGM
FM
FM
FM
FM
FF

FM - FGM 3
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter
Chaptre - Capitulo

Attacchi - Connections - Fixations - Conexiones
DN 65 - DN 80 - DN 100
DN 15 - DN 20 - DN 25
DN 15 - DN 20 - DN 25
DN 32 - DN 40 - DN 50
DN 25M * - DN 32
DN 25M * - DN 32
DN 200 - DN 300
DN 125 - DN 150
FMC COMPACT
DN 40 - DN 50
DN 40 - DN 50
Modello
Model
Modle
Versin
FGM
FM
FM
FM
FM
FF
4 FM - FGM
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter
Attacchi Filettati - Threaded Connections
P. max 2 bar
Fixations filetees - Conexiones roscadas
Filtraggio 50 micron Filtraggio 20 micron Filtraggio 10 micron

Attacchi
Foto Connections
Filtering 50 micron Filtering 20 micron Filtering 10 micron
Photo Fixations
Codice Codice Codice
Conexiones
Code Code Code
FMC compact DN 15 FMC02 B50 FMC02 B20 FMC02 B10
DN 20 FMC03 B50 FMC03 B20 FMC03 B10
DN 25 FMC04 B50 FMC04 B20 FMC04 B10
FM DN 15 FM02 B50 FM02 B20 FM02 B10
DN 20 FM03 B50 FM03 B20 FM03 B10
DN 25 FM04 B50 FM04 B20 FM04 B10
FM FM DN 25M * FM04M B50 FM04M B20 FM04M B10
FM DN 32 FM05 B50 FM05 B20 FM05 B10
FM DN 40 FM06 B50 FM06 B20 FM06 B10
FM
FM DN 50 FM07 B50 FM07 B20 FM07 B10
FGM DN 25M * FGM04M B50 - -

FGM
FGM DN 32 FGM05 B50 - -
FGM DN 40 FGM06 B50 - -
FGM DN 50 FGM07 B50 - -
Attacchi Flangiati - Flanged Connections

P. max 2 bar
Fixations Bridees - Conexiones de Brida
FM DN 25 FM25 B50 FM25 B20 FM25 B10
FM DN 25M * FM25M B50 FM25M * B20 FM25M * B10
FGM DN 25M * FGM25M B50 - -
FF DN 32 FF32 B50 - -
FF DN 40 FF40 B50 - -
FF DN 50 FF50 B50 - -
FM DN 65 FF08 B50 FF08 B20 FF08 B10
FM DN 80 FF09 B50 FF09 B20 FF09 B10
FM DN 100 FF10 B50 FF10 B20 FF10 B10
FM DN 125 - - FF11 B10
FM DN 150 - - FF12 B10
FM DN 200 - - FF13 M10
FM DN 300 - - FF15 M10

FM - FGM 5
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter
Chaptre - Capitulo

Attacchi Filettati - Threaded Connections

P. max 6 bar
Fixations filetees - Conexiones roscadas
Filtraggio 50 micron Filtraggio 20 micron Filtraggio 10 micron

Attacchi
Foto Connections
Filtering 50 micron Filtering 20 micron Filtering 10 micron
Photo Fixations
Codice Codice Codice
Conexiones
Code Code Code
FMC compact DN 15 FMC020000 B50 FMC020000 B20 FMC020000 B10

DN 20 FMC030000 B50 FMC030000 B20 FMC030000 B10
DN 25 FMC040000 B50 FMC040000 B20 FMC040000 B10
FM DN 15 FM020000 B50 FM020000 B20 FM020000 B10

DN 20 FM030000 B50 FM030000 B20 FM030000 B10
DN 25 FM040000 B50 FM040000 B20 FM040000 B10
FM FM DN 25M * FM04M0000 B50 FM04M0000 B20 FM04M0000 B10
FM DN 32 FM050000 B50 FM050000 B20 FM050000 B10
FM DN 40 FM060000 B50 FM060000 B20 FM060000 B10
FM
FM DN 50 FM070000 B50 FM070000 B20 FM070000 B10
FGM DN 25M * FGM04M0000 B50 - -

FGM
FGM DN 32 FGM050000 B50 - -
FGM DN 40 FGM060000 B50 - -
FGM DN 50 FGM070000 B50 - -
Attacchi Flangiati - Flanged Connections

P. max 6 bar
Fixations Bridees - Conexiones de Brida
FM DN 25 FM250000 B50 FM25 B20 FM25 B10
FM DN 25M * FM25M0000 B50 FM25M * B20 FM25M * B10
FGM DN 25M * FGM25M0000 B50 - -
FF DN 32 FF320000 B50 - -
FF DN 40 FF400000 B50 - -
FF DN 50 FF500000 B50 - -
FM DN 65 FF080000 B50 FF08 B20 FF08 B10
FM DN 80 FF090000 B50 FF09 B20 FF09 B10
FM DN 100 FF100000 B50 FF10 B20 FF10 B10
FM DN 125 - - FF11 B10
FM DN 150 - - FF12 B10
FM DN 200 - - FF13 M10
FM DN 300 - - FF15 M10
6 FM - FGM
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter
fig. 1 FMC DN 15 25
fig. 1, 2 e 3 fig. 1, 2 and 3
1 - Coperchio / Fondello 1 - Cover / Bottom

2 - Organo filtrante 2 - Filtering organ
3 - Corpo 3 - Body
4 - Guide di sistemazione 4 - Slotting guides
5 - Viti di fissaggio 5 - Fixing screws
6 - O-Ring di tenuta 6 - Seal O-Ring
7 - Presa di pressione 7 - Pressure nipple
fig. 1, 2 et 3 fig. 1, 2 y 3
1 - Couvercle / Basement 1 - Tapa / Fondo

2 - Composant filtrant 2 - Elemento filtrante
3 - Corps 3 - Cuerpo
4 - Guides 4 - Guas de ubicacin
vista dallalto senza coperchio 5 - Vis de fixation 5 - Tornillos de fijacin
view from above without cover 6 - O-Ring de tenue 6 - Junta trica de estanquidad
vue du haut sans couvercle 7 - Prise de pression 7 - Toma de presin
vista superior sin tapa
FM DN 32 50
fig. 3
FM DN 15 25
fig. 2
vista dallalto senza coperchio

view from above without cover
vue du haut sans couvercle


FM - FGM 7
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter
Chaptre - Capitulo

FGM DN 25 50 FM DN 65 100
fig. 4
fig. 5

FM DN 125 300

fig. 4,5 e 6 fig. 4, 5 and 6
fig. 6 1 - Coperchio / Fondello 1 - Cover / Bottom

2 - Organo filtrante 2 - Filtering organ
3 - Corpo 3 - Body
4 - Guide di sistemazione 4 - Slotting guides
5 - Viti di fissaggio 5 - Fixing screws
6 - O-Ring di tenuta 6 - Seal O-Ring
7 - Presa di pressione 7 - Pressure nipple
8 - Alette speciali 8 - Special tongues
fig. 4,5 et 6 fig. 4,5 y 6
1 - Couvercle / Basement 1 - Tapa / Fondo

2 - Composant filtrant 2 - Elemento filtrante
3 - Corps 3 - Cuerpo
4 - Guides 4 - Guas de ubicacin
5 - Vis de fixation 5 - Tornillos de fijacin
6 - O-Ring de tenue 6 - Junta trica de estanquidad
7 - Prise de pression 7 - Toma de presin
8 - Ailettes spciales 8 - Aletas especiales

8 FM - FGM
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter
DIAGRAMMA PERDITE DI CARICO FMC - FM - FGM (filtraggio 50 m) - FMC - FM - FGM PRESSURE DROPS DIAGRAM (filtering 50 m)
DIAGRAMME PERTES DE CHARGE FMC - FM - FGM (filtrage 50 m) - DIAGRAMA DE CAUDALES FMC - FM - FGM (filtracin 50 m)
5*
-2
1) metano
2) aria
3) gas di citt
4) gpl
1) methane
2) air
3) town gas
4) lpg
1) mthane
2) air
3) gaz de ville
4) gaz liquide
1) methane
2) aire
3) gas de ciudad
4) glp
* versione compact - compact version - version compact - versin compact # attacchi DN 25 con corpo DN 32 - DN 25 connections with DN 32 body - fixations DN 25 avec un corps DN 32 - conexiones DN 25 con cuerpo DN 32
DIAGRAMMA PERDITE DI CARICO FMC - FM - FGM (filtraggio 20 m) - FMC - FM - FGM PRESSURE DROPS DIAGRAM (filtering 20 m)
DIAGRAMME PERTES DE CHARGE FMC - FM - FGM (filtrage 20 m) - DIAGRAMA DE CAUDALES FMC - FM - FGM (filtracin 20 m)
5*
1) metano
-2
2) aria
3) gas di citt
4) gpl
1) methane
2) air
3) town gas
4) lpg
1) mthane
2) air
3) gaz de ville
4) gaz liquide
1) methane
2) aire
3) gas de ciudad
4) glp

FM - FGM 9
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter
Chaptre - Capitulo

DIAGRAMMA PERDITE DI CARICO FMC - FM (filtraggio 10 m) - FMC - FM PRESSURE DROPS DIAGRAM (filtering 10 m)
DIAGRAMME PERTES DE CHARGE FMC - FM (filtrage 10 m) - DIAGRAMA DE CAUDALES FMC - FM (filtracin 10 m)
5*
-2
5
12
DN
1) metano 1) methane 1) mthane 1) methane

2) aria 2) air 2) air 2) aire
3) gas di citt 3) town gas 3) gaz de ville 3) gas de ciudad
4) gpl 4) lpg 4) gaz liquide 4) glp
10 FM - FGM
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter
Misure di ingombro in mm DN25M = attacchi DN 25 con corpo DN 32
Overall dimensions in mm DN25M = DN 25 connections with DN 32 body
Mesures dencombrement en mm DN25M = fixations DN 25 avec un corps DN 32
DN25M = conexiones DN 25 con cuerpo DN 32
Dimensiones en mm
Tipo Attacchi filettati Attacchi flangiati superficie filtrante (mm2)

Type Threaded sizes Flanged connections filtering surface (mm2)
A B Kg
Type Fixations filetees Fixations bridees filtre de surface (mm2)
Tipo Conexiones roscadas Conexiones de brida superficie del filtro (mm2)
FMC DN 15 (compact) - 70 63 0,35 3890
FMC DN 20 (compact) - 70 63 0,35 3890
FMC DN 25 (compact) 70 63 0,35 3890
FM DN 15 - 120 72 0,5 4560
FM DN 20 - 120 72 0,5 4560
FM DN 25 - 120 72 0,5 4560
FM DN 25M 160 87 1,25 19040
FM DN 32 - 160 87 1,2 19040
FM DN 40 - 160 87 1,2 19040
FM DN 50 - 160 110 1,35 26770
FM - DN 25 192 115 3,2 19040
FF - DN 32 230 150 2,5 10650
FF - DN 40 230 150 2,5 10650
FF - DN 50 230 150 2,5 10650
FGM DN 25M 160 135 1,4 10650
FGM DN 32 160 135 1,35 10650
FGM DN 40 160 135 1,35 10650
FGM DN 50 160 135 1,35 10650
FM - DN 65 290 180 5,3 39240
FM - DN 80 310 195 5,7 39240
FM - DN 100 350 211 9,8 (P. max. 2 Bar) 15 (P. max 6 Bar) 76250
FM - DN 125 480 302 25 198000
FM - DN 150 480 302 26,2 198000
FM - DN 200 600 380 50 -
FM - DN 300 737 510 90 -
FM FGM FMC
FM
FF

FM - FGM 11
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter
Chaptre - Capitulo

INSTALLAZIONE INSTALLATION INSTALLATION INSTALACIN

Si raccomanda di leggere It is always important to read Lire attentivement les Se recomienda leer
attentamente il foglio di istruzioni carefully the instruction sheet instructions pour chaque atentamente la hoja de
a corredo di ogni prodotto. of each product. produit. instrucciones adjuntas con el
producto.
ATTENZIONE: le operazioni di WARNING: all installation/ ATTENTION: les oprations ATENCIN. Las operaciones de
installazione/manutenzione devono maintenance work must be carried out dinstallation/entretien doivent tre instalacin y mantenimiento deben ser
essere eseguite da personale qualificato. by skilled staff. excutes par du personnel qualifi. efectuadas por personal cualificado.
E necessario chiudere il gas prima The gas supply must be shut off before Fermer le gaz avant linstallation. Antes de iniciar las operaciones de
dellinstallazione. installation. instalacin es necesario cerrar el gas.
Verificare che la pressione di linea NON Check that the line pressure DOES NOT Vrifier que la pression de ligne NE SOIT Verificar que la presin de la lnea NO
SIA SUPERIORE alla pressione EXCEED the maximum pressure stated PAS SUPRIEURE la pression SEA SUPERIOR a la presin mxima
massima dichiarata sulletichetta del on the product label. maximum dclare sur ltiquette du indicada en la etiqueta del producto.
prodotto. produit.
Il filtro normalmente posizionato a The filter is normally installed upstream the Le filtre est normalement situ en amont de El filtro viene normalmente posicionado ro
monte di tutti gli organi di regolazione e regulation organs and the interception tous les organes de rglage et darrt. Il arriba de todos los rganos de regulacin
intercettazione. Deve essere installato device. It must be installed with the arrow doit tre install avec la flche (en relief y interceptacin. Debe ser instalado con
con la freccia (in rilievo sul corpo in (on the body valve) towards the user. sur le corps ou sur le couvercle) tourne la flecha (en relieve en el cuerpo de
alluminio o sul coperchio) rivolta verso vers le tuyau principal. aluminio o en la tapa) hacia el punto de
lutenza. consumo.
Pu essere installato in qualsiasi posizione It can be installed in any position without Il peut tre install dans nimporte quelle Se puede instalar en cualquier posicin sin
senza che ne venga pregiudicato il corretto compromising the correct working. position sans que son fonctionnement perjudicar el correcto funcionamiento.
funzionamento. Allesterno del filtro Outside the filter there is a checking correct soit compromis. A lextrieur du Al exterior del filtro est una toma de
sistemata una presa di pressione per pressure-tap. filtre est installe une prise de pression presin por el eventual control.
leventuale controllo. pour lventuel contrle.
Durante linstallazione evitare che detriti During installation take care not to allow Pendant linstallation, viter que des Durante la instalacin prestar atencin
o residui metallici penetrino allinterno debris or scraps of metal to enter the dtritus ou des rsidus mtalliques a fin de evitar que detritos o residuos
dellapparecchio. device. pntrent dans lappareil. metlicos se introduzcan en el aparato.
Se lapparecchio filettato verificare che If the device is threaded check that the Si lappareil est filet, vrifier que le filet En el caso de aparato roscado ser
la lunghezza del filetto della tubazione pipeline thread is not too long; overlong de la tuyauterie ne soit pas trop long necesario verificar que la longitud de
non sia eccessiva per non danneggiare threads may damage the body of the pour ne pas endommager le corps de la rosca de la tubera no sea excesiva
il corpo dellapparecchio in fase di device when screwed into place. lappareil lors du vissage. dado que, durante el enroscado, podra
avvitamento. provocar daos en el cuerpo del aparato
mismo.
Se lapparecchio flangiato verificare che If the device is flanged check that the Si lappareil est brid, vrifier que les En el caso de aparato embridado,
le controflange di ingresso e uscita siano inlet and outlet counterflanges are contre-brides dentre et de sortie ser necesario controlar que las
perfettamente parallele per evitare perfectly parallel to avoid unnecessary soient parfaitement parallles pour contrabridas de entrada y de salida
di sottoporre il corpo a inutili sforzi mechanical stresses on the body of viter de soumettre le corps des queden perfectamente paralelas a fin
meccanici, calcolare inoltre lo spazio the device. Also calculate the space efforts mcaniques inutiles; par ailleurs, de evitar que el cuerpo quede sometido
per linserimento della guarnizione di needed to fit the seal. If the gap left calculer lespace pour lintroduction du a fuerzas mecnicas intiles. Calcular
tenuta. Se a guarnizioni inserite lo spazio after the seal is fitted is too wide, do joint dtanchit. Si, lorsque les joints adems el espacio para la introduccin
rimanente eccessivo non cercare di not try to close it by over-tightening the sont introduits, lespace restant est de la junta de estanqueidad. Si una
colmarlo stringendo eccessivamente i devices bolts. excessif, ne pas essayer de le combler vez introducidas las juntas el espacio
bulloni dellapparecchio. en serrant trop fort les boulons de restante es excesivo, no apretar
lappareil. demasiado los pernos del aparato para
intentar reducirlo.
In ogni caso dopo linstallazione verificare Always check that the system is gas-tight De toute faon, aprs linstallation vrifier De todas formas, verificar la estanqueidad
la tenuta dellimpianto. after installation. ltanchit de linstallation. del sistema una vez efectuada la
instalacin.
ESEMPIO DI INSTALLAZIONE EXAMPLE OF INSTALLATION EXEMPLE DINSTALLATION EJEMPLO DE INSTALACIN
1. Valvola a strappo SM 1. SM series jerk handle ON/OFF valve 1. Soupape dchirement SM 1. Vlvula de corte SM
2. Filtro gas serie FM 2. FM series gas filter 2. Filtre gaz srie FM 2. Filtro gas serie FM
3. Valvola di blocco MVB/1 MAX o MIN 3. MVB/1 MAX or MIN shut off valve 3. Soupape de bloc MVB/1 MAX ou MIN 3. Vlvulas de bloqueo MVB/1 MAX o MIN
4. Regolatore gas serie RG/2MC 4. RG/2MC series pressure regulator 4. Rgulateur gaz srie RG/2MC 4. Regulador gas serie RG/2MC
5. Valvola di sfioro MVS/1 5. MVS/1 overflow valve 5. Soupape deffleurement MVS/1 5. Vlvula de alivio MVS/1
6. Leva comando a distanza valvola a strappo SM 6. Lever for remote SM ON/OFF valve control 6. Levier de comande distance soupape 6. Palanca para actuacin de de la vlvula
dchirement SM de corte SM
Scarico in aria libera

Free air exhaust
Evacuation lair libre
Escape en aire libre
utenza
rete - pipe user
rseau - red utilisateur
punto de consumo
12 FM - FGM
October 2011
Capitolo - Chapter
MANUTENZIONE SERVICING MANUTENTION MANTENIMIENTO
In ogni caso prima di effettuare verifiche interne In all cases, before performing any Avant de faire des vrifications internes, De todas formas, antes de efectuar
accertarsi che all'interno dellapparecchio non internal checks make sure that there is no sassurer quil ny ait pas de gaz sous verificaciones internas, controlar que en su
vi sia gas in pressione. pressurised gas inside the device. pression dans lappareil. interior no haya gas en presin.
Togliere il coperchio (1) svitando le viti Remove cover (1) and unscrew the fixing Enlever le couvercle (1) en dvissant les vis de Quitar la tapa (1) desenroscando los tornillos de
di fissaggio (5). Smontare la cartuccia screws (5). Disassemble the filter cartridge fixation (5). Dmonter la cartouche filtrante fijacin (5). Desmontar el cartucho filtrante (2),
filtrante (2), pulirla con acqua e sapone, (2), clean with soap and water, blow with (2), la nettoyer avec de leau et du savon et lavarlo con agua y jabn y soplarlo con aire
soffiarla con aria compressa (o sostituirla compressed air (or substitute if necessary) y souffler de lair comprim (ou la remplacer comprimido, o bien sustituirlo si es necesario,
se necessario) e rimontarla nella posizione and re-assemble in the original position si ncessaire); la remonter dans la position y volver a montarlo en su posicin original,
iniziale controllando che sia sistemata tra checking that it is properly positioned in initiale en contrlant quelle soit bien place controlando que quede ubicado entre las
le apposite guide (4) controllando che non the guides (4), and check that it does not entre les guides (4) et quelle ne gne pas le guas correspondientes (4) y que no impida la
ostacoli il montaggio del coperchio (1). prevent assembly of the cover (1). montage du couvercle (1). colocacin de la tapa (1).
Infine rimontare il coperchio (1) facendo Lastly re-assemble the cover (1) making sure Remonter le couvercle (1) en faisant Por ltimo, colocar la tapa (1) nuevamente
attenzione che lO-Ring (6) sia sistemato that the O-ring (6) is in the correct position. attention que le joint torique (6) soit plac prestando atencin en que la junta trica
nellapposita cava. dans son logement. de cierre (6) quede ubicada en la ranura
correspondiente.
Le suddette operazioni devono The above-said operations must Les oprations mentionnes ci- Las operaciones antes indicadas
essere eseguite esclusivamente da be carried out only by qualified dessus doivent tre excutes deben ser ejecutadas nicamente
tecnici qualificati. technicians. exclusivement par des techniciens por tcnicos cualificados.
qualifis.

FM - FGM 13
October 2011
7 712
QRA7 with clamp QRA10... QRA53..., QRA55... with clamp QRA2... with clamp
Flame Detectors QRA2...

QRA10...
QRA53...
QRA55...
QRA73
QRA75
The UV flame detectors are designed for use with Siemens burner controls, for
the supervision of gas or oil flames.
The QRA... and this Data Sheet are intended for use by OEMs which integrate the
flame detectors in their products.
CC1N7712en Building Technologies Division

22.02.2011 Industry Sector
Use
The flame detectors are used for the supervision of gas flames, yellow- or blue-burning
oil flames and for ignition spark proving.
Flame detector For use with burner control type Operating mode
QRA2..., QRA10... LGB2... / LGB4... with AGQ1... Intermittent
LFL...
LFE1...
LFE10...
LMG... with AGQ2...
LME21 / LME22 / LME39 with
AGQ3
LMV2 / LMV3...
LMV5 with AGQ1
QRA53..., QRA55... LGK16... Continuous op-
LGI16... eration
QRA73, QRA75 LMV5 Continuous op-
eration
Warning notes
To avoid injury to persons, damage to property or the environment, the following
warning notes must be observed!
All activities (mounting, installation and service work, etc.) must be performed by
qualified staff
Before making any wiring changes in the connection area, completely isolate the
plant from mains supply (all-polar disconnection). Ensure that the plant cannot be
inadvertently switched on again and that it is indeed dead. If not observed, there is
a risk of electric shock hazard.
Ensure protection against electric shock hazard by providing adequate protection
for the terminals. If this is not observed, there is a risk of electric shock
Each time work has been carried out (mounting, installation, service work, etc.),
check to ensure that wiring is in an orderly state. If this is not observed, there is a
risk of electric shock
Halogen lamps, welding equipment, special lamps or ignition sparks may produce
sufficient radiation for the detectors UV cell to ignite. X-rays and gamma radiation
can also generate erroneous flame signals. If this is not observed, there is a risk
of loss of safety functions
Fall or shock can adversely affect the safety functions. Such units must not be put
into operation, even if they do not exhibit any damage. If this is not observed,
there is a risk of loss of safety functions and a risk of electric shock
Mounting notes
Installation notes
Always run the high-voltage ignition cables separate while observing the greatest
possible distance to the detector and to other cables
Electrical connection of the flame detector

It is important to achieve practically disturbance- and loss-free signal transmission:
Never run the detector cable together with other cables
Line capacitance reduces the magnitude of the flame signal
Use a separate cable
Observe the permissible lengths of the detector cable (refer to Technical data in
the Data Sheet of the relevant burner control)
2/15
Building Technologies Division CC1N7712en

Industry Sector 22.02.2011
Commissioning notes
Trouble-free burner operation is ensured only when the intensity of UV radiation at
the detectors location is high enough for the detectors UV cell to ignite during
each half wave. The intensity of UV radiation at the detectors location is
checked through measurement of the detector current
Measuring circuit for 9 10 LFE10...

QRA2..., QRA10...,
QRA5...series D and bl sw AGQ1... / AGQ2... / AGQ3...
QRA5...series G
22 23 LGK16...
23 22 LFL1...
15 13 LFE1...
M1
2 1 X10-06 LMV2... / LMV3...
7712v01/0907
Legend 1) Connection of micro-ammeter across AGQ1... / AGQ2... / AGQ3... adapter and flame detector
A Incidence of radiation
M Micro-ammeter (DC), internal resistance 5000
C Electrolytic capacitor 100...470 F, DC 10...25 V
Measuring circuit for

QRA5... up to the QRA53 AGM19 LGK16...
C-series and QRA55 - + LG I 16...
QRA5...series E M KF8832
7712v03/9602
Note!
& The KF8832 flame detector current measuring device must not be used in continuous
operation!
Minimum detector current values required:

Refer to the Data Sheet of the relevant burner control or to the Operating Instructions of
the KF8832.
Measuring circuit for Legend

QRA7...
M2 Voltmeter direct current
voltage
Measurement range 0...10V
Internal resistance Ri >10M
3/15

Certificates
Conformity to EEC directives
- Electromagnetic compatibility EMC (immunity) 2004/108/EC
- Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC
ISO 9001: 2010 ISO 14001: 2010

Cert. 00739 Cert. 38233
Service notes
Use the KF8832 service unit for short periods of time only
Disposal notes
The flame detector contains electrical and electronic components and must not be dis-
posed of together with domestic waste.
4/15

Mechanical design
Flame detectors Plastic housing, metalized to prevent static charging caused by the air flow from the
QRA2... fan. For mounting direct on the burner. The detectors can be supplied with or without
securing flange (version 4 241 8855 0) and clamp (refer to Type summary).
Flame detectors Die-cast aluminium housing with a 1in. mounting coupling (D) and connection facility for
QRA10... cooling air. The housing of this detector has a bayonet fitting which allows it to be se-
cured either directly to the 1 in. mounting coupling or to the AGG06 glass holder. The 1
in. mounting coupling can be screwed to a viewing tube or to the AGG07 ball head. The
Pg cable gland can be removed and replaced, if some other detector cable shall be
used.
Flame detectors The detectors UV cell is located behind a swiveling shutter at the front end of the de-
QRA5..., QRA7 tector tube which is flanged to the housing. A quartz-glass window protects the tube
and the shutter against dirt. The detectors housing accommodates a stepper motor to
drive the shutter and the electronics to control the shutter. Using the AGG16.C adapter,
this flame detectors can be mounted either directly on the burner, on a viewing tube or
on a combustion chamber viewing hole.
Plug AGM19 AGM19 complete with cable for the connection of QRA53... and QRA55... flame detec-
tors.
Adapter AGG16.C AGG16.C for QRA53..., QRA55..., made of die-cast aluminium with a 1 in. mounting
coupling. The 1 in. mounting coupling (D) is attached to the housing with a bayonet
fitting.
QRA5... / QRA7...
AGG16.C
AGG03
7712m08/0907
AGG06
AGG02
AGG06
AGG05 QRA5... / QRA7 with AGG16.C and

7712z05/0403
AGG06
AGG07
Note!
& AGG03 or AGG02 can also be fitted in the 1 in. mounting coupling (D) of the AGG16.C
(or QRA10...). An adapter combination with AGG06 glass holder, mounting coupling
and ball joint for QRA53..., QRA55..., QRA7 and QRA10... is possible.
Connector AGM23 Connector AGM23 with cable for the electrical connection of flame detector QRA7
Connector AGM23U Connector AGM23 with wires for the electrical connection of flame detector QRA7 in
US design
5/15

Mechanical design (contd)
Glass and quartz-glass The glass and quartz-glass lens holder AGG06 serves for holding the AGG03 lens and
lens holder AGG06 the AGG02 heat insulation glass.
The lens is used to increase the sensitivity, and the heat insulation glass provides pro-
tection against high temperatures, thus extending the life of the UV cell.
The AGG06 also allows various combinations of lens, heat insulation glass and 1 in.
mounting coupling.
When using the lens and the heat insulation glass, the AGG06 with the lens must be
mounted as close as possible to the flame detector.
AGG16.C AGG16.C
AGG03! AGG02
AGG06 AGG06
AGG02 !
7712z06/0403
AGG03
7712z07/0403
AGG06 AGG06
Correct Wrong
AGG06 has a bayonet fitting with which it is attached either to the housing of the
AGG16.C or to the housing of the QRA10... and the 1 in. mounting coupling.
By undoing the bayonet fittings on both sides, the AGG06 glass holder(s) can be easily
detached from the combination of QRA10... or AGG16.C and QRA53... or QRA55....
This facilitates straightforward cleaning of the glass or lens without having to remove
them from the AGG06 glass holder.
The intermediate rings are used for the smooth running of the bayonet fittings, espe-
cially where after removal of the flame detector the hole to the combustion chamber
serves as a viewing tube.
By fitting the intermediate ring to the appropriate bayonet connection, the combination
can be undone where required by rotating the housing of the QRA10... or AGG16.C
Quartz-glass lens AGG03 with spring washer and O-ring for increasing the sensitivity.
AGG03
Heat insulation glass AGG02 with spring washer and O-ring, offering the same mounting choices as AGG03.
AGG02 This heat insulation glass is required on applications where the temperature at the
flame detector exceeds 80 C.
Mounting coupling (D) Using the bayonet fitting, the 1 in. mounting coupling can be attached either to the
AGG06, the AGG16.C or the QRA10... flame detector.
The mounting coupling is supplied with the QRA10... or AGG16.C.
Nipple AGG05 1in. nipple AGG05 for connecting the 1in. mounting coupling (D) to the AGG07 ball
head.
Ball head AGG07 AGG07 with 1in. internal thread.

Connection on AGG05 and for use with the 1in. mounting coupling and AGG06.
The AGG07 is used for mounting on a rigid surface, such as the boiler wall.
It facilitates optimum adjustment of the viewing angle.
6/15

Type summary
Flame detectors Type reference Sensitivity Flange and Terminal cover Spare UV tube
clamp
QRA2 Without
QRA2(1) Normal With Black AGR4 502 1131 0
QRA2.9 ) Without
QRA2M High Without Green AGR4 502 4065 0
QRA2M(1) With
QRA10.C Normal --- --- AGR4 502 1131 0
QRA10M.C High AGR4 502 4065 0
1) With heat-resistant housing for ambient temperatures up to 200 C (short-time, up to a few seconds)
Type refer- Sensitivity Detector Mains voltage Spare UV tube

ence tube length
QRA53.C27 AC 220...240 V
normal 125 mm
QRA53.C17 AC 100...110 V
QRA53.D27 AC 220...240 V
high 125 mm
QRA53.D17 AC 100...110 V
QRA53.E27 AC 220...240 V
normal 125 mm
QRA53.E17 AC 100...110 V
QRA53.G27 AC 220...240 V
high 125 mm
QRA53.G17 AC 100...110 V
AGR4 502 4065 0
QRA55.C27 AC 220...240 V
normal 69 mm
QRA55.C17 AC 100...110 V
QRA55.D27 AC 220...240 V
high 69 mm
QRA55.D17 AC 100...110 V
QRA55.E27 AC 220...240 V
normal 69 mm
QRA55.E17 AC 100...110 V
QRA55.G27 AC 220...240 V
high 69 mm
QRA55.G17 AC 100...110 V
Type refer- Detector

Sensitivity Mains voltage Spare UV tube
ence tube length
QRA73.A27 AC 230 V +10 / -15 %
normal 125 mm
QRA73.A17 AC 120 V +10 / -15 %
AGR4 502 4065 0
QRA75.A27 AC 230 V +10 / -15 %
normal 69 mm
QRA75.A17 AC 120 V +10 / -15 %
& Note!
Mounting Instruction for replacing of spare UV tube, refer to 4 319 9513 0 (M7712.5)!
Note!
& All QRA5... and QRA7... are delivered complete with clamp. Use of the detector re-
quires a connecting cable AGM19 / AGM23 / AGM23U (refer to Accessories for
QRA5... / QRA7...).
7/15

Type summary (contd)
Accessories for QRA2... Part For use with Part number

and QRA5... and Flange ) rounded QRA2... 4 241 8855 0
QRA7 when Flange straight QRA2... 4 241 8898 0
ordered as single items Clamp ) QRA2... 4 199 8806 0
Clamp for direct mounting QRA5... / QRA7 4 199 1034 0
1) Supplied with QRA2...(1) types
Accessories for QRA2... AGG09 IP40-Kit

- cable sealing element 5...8 mm
Accessories for QRA5...

/ QRA7
AGG16.C adapter
- for flame detector mounting QRA53... and QRA55... / QRA7
AGM19 connecting cable

- cable length 2 m
- with plug for QRA53..., QRA55...
KF8832 unit for measuring the detector current

- with QRA53..., QRA55... recommended for use with detector
types up to the C-series
AGM23 connecting cable

- cable length 2 m
- with plug for QRA7
AGM23U connecting cable

- cable length 4 m
- with plug for QRA7
- US design
8/15

Type summary (contd)
Accessories for AGG02 heat insulation glass

QRA10... and AGG16.C - with spring washer and O-ring
AGG03 quartz-glass lens

- with spring washer and O-ring
- for detectors of the B-series, lens AGG01 is available
AGG05 nipple 1 in.
AGG06 glass and quartz-glass lens holder

- with intermediate ring
AGG07 ball head

- with 1 in. internal thread
- swivel range 13
AGG08 IP65-kit for QRA10...

- for different types of cable diameter
Cable sealing element in mm Color

4...6,5 mm Yellow
6,5...9,5 Black
9...15 Red
Ordering
When ordering, please give type references according to Type summary.
9/15

Technical data
General detector data Average life of UV cell Approx. 10,000 hours at max. 50 C, higher
ambient temperatures reduce considerably
the cells life
Perm. combustion chamber pressure
- QRA10... Max. 50 mbar
- QRA10... + AGG03 or AGG02 Max. 500 mbar
Degree of protection
- QRA2... IP20
& Note!
IP40 conforming to DIN EN 60529
when using adequate cable entries
(e.g. AGG09).
- QRA10... IP54 (IP65 with AGG08)

- QRA5x.C... / QRA5x.D... IP54
- QRA5x.E... / QRA5x.G... IP65
- QRA7 IP65
Mounting position Optional
Weight
- AGG01 Approx. 10g
- AGG02 Approx. 10g
- AGG03 Approx. 10g
- AGG05 Approx. 170g
- AGG16.C Approx. 650g
- QRA2... Approx. 46g
- QRA10... Approx. 740g
- QRA10... + AGG03 Approx. 750g
- QRA5x.C..., QRA5x.D... Approx. 600g
- QRA5x.E..., QRA5x.G... Approx. 700 g
- QRA7 Approx. 700g
Ignition cable (only QRA2...) 2 x 0.75 mm; 5.1 mm dia.
Environmental Storage DIN EN 60721-3-1

conditions Climatic conditions Class 1K3
Mechanical conditions Class 1M2
Humidity <95 % r.h.
Transport DIN EN 60721-3-2
Climatic conditions Class 2K2
Humidity <95 % r.h.
Operation DIN EN 60721-3-3
Climatic conditions Class 3K3
Humidity <95 % r.h.
Caution!
10/15

Function
With this type of flame supervision, the UV radiation emitted by gas or oil flames is
used to generate the flame signal.
The radiation detector consists of a UV-sensitive cell with 2 electrodes, which ignite
when illuminated with radiation in the 190...270 nm range of the spectrum, thereby
triggering a current in the flame detector circuit.
The UV cell does not respond to glowing firebrick in the combustion chamber, daylight
or light from boiler room illumination.
Dimensions (contd)
Dimensions in mm
QRA2...
97
10
25...50 2,5
30
M4
18
22,5
48
18
7712m07/0597
QRA10...
87
SW20
52
66
SW22
120
''
8
3
R1 ''
7712m02/0997
UV
Pg13,5
65
11/15

Dimensions (contd)
Dimensions in mm
QRA5xC... /
QRA5xD...
7712m14/0909
12
32
62
AGM19
60
125 (QRA53...)
70 (QRA55...) 102 72
QRA5x.E... /
7712m13/0909
QRA5x.G...
12
32
75
124,5 (QRA53...) 64
108
68,5 (QRA55...) 112,1
72
12/15

Dimensions (contd)
Dimensions in mm
QRA5... with AGG05, AGG06, AGG07, AGG16.C and AGM19
AGG16.C
7712m01/0403
AGG16.C
13/15

Dimensions (contd)
Dimensions in mm
QRA7 with AGM23
12
32
75
124,5 (QRA73...)
68,5 (QRA75...) 108 62,1
112,1
72
7712m11/0108
QRA7 with AGM23U
12
32
75
124,5 (QRA73...)
68,5 (QRA75...) 108 81
112,1
72
7712m12/0108
Incidence of radiation for QRA5... / QRA7...
UV
40 30
7712z08/0111
14/15

Dimensions (contd)
Dimensions in mm
Accessories
4 199 1034 0
Clamp for direct mounting on the burner or the AGG16.C
46
40
7712m15/0111
60
AGG02 AGG03
4 241 8855 0 4 241 8898 0

36
24 36
.3
18
R2 R4
R4
7
7
R0.3
25
R2
30
30
25
15
15
3
7712m09e/1001 7712m10e/1001
Company logo to 3 10 Company logo to

18 3 10 24
LN 3 8380 0102 LN 3 8380 0102
0.2 mm elevated 24 0.2 mm elevated 48
48
2011 Siemens AG Industry Sector Building Technologies Division

Subject to change!
15/15

64-0055-Giunti GA-GAF 3-03-2009 18:21 Pagina 1
Giunti antivibranti
Gas compensator joints
Caratteristiche principali Main features
I giunti antivibranti e di compensazione serie GA The antivibrating and compensating couplings GA

e GAF sono idonei ad essere installati sulla linea and GAF series are suitable to be installed on one
di alimentazione dei bruciatori di gas compresi feeding line of gas burners included the mixed
quelli misti e combinati. and combined one.
A Company of Watts Industries Europe B.V.

GIUNTI ANTIVIBRANTI / GAS COMPENSATOR JOINTS A Company of Watts Industries Europe B.V.
DATI TECNICI TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Caratteristiche : Specifications :
I giunti antivibranti sono stati costruiti secondo quanto The antivibrating and compensating couplings have been
2 manufactured according to the UNI EN 13480 standard and
previsto dalle norme UNI EN 13480 e testati secondo le
norme ISO 10380 riguardanti i tubi flessibili. Inoltre, sono tested according to the ISO 10380 regulations concerning
certificati secondo la Direttiva Europea "PED" (97-23-CE) in flexible tube. Beside, they have been certified in
materia di attrezzatture in pressione. compliance with the PED (97-23-CE) European Directive
concerning the equipment under pressure.
I giunti della serie GA, con attacchi filettati, sono costruiti
interamente in acciaio inox (Aisi 304 per i manicotti filettati The compensator joints GA series, with threaded
ed Aisi 321 per i soffietti). I giunti flangiati serie GAF sono connection, are fully in stainless steel (the threaded
costruiti con flange in acciaio al carbonio e soffietti in coupling in Aisi 304 and the bellow in Aisi 321). The flanged
acciaio inox (Aisi 321). In ogni caso, come previsto dalle compensator joints GAF series are manufactured with the
norme DIN, le parti a contatto con il gas sono in acciaio flanges in carbon steel and the bellowsin stainless steel
inox. (Aisi 321). In any cases, to comply with the DIN regulations,
Le flange sono libere, tale soluzione rende estremamente all the parts in contact with the gas are made of stainless
facile il montaggio in quanto, essendo girevoli, si possono steel.
allineare i fori in modo perfetto con le controflange The flanges are free and this allows its fitting extremely
dell'impianto, eliminando dannose torsioni al soffietto. easy as, being revolvable, their holes can be perfectly
allined with the counter-flanges of the plant, thus avoiding
Istruzioni per il montaggio : dangeous torsions to the bellow.
I giunti si possono installare in qualsiasi posizione.
Per l'installazione dei modelli filettati utilizzare un comune Installation Instructions :
giratubi e, per eventuali raccordi girevoli da applicare al The compensator joints can be installed in any positions.
manicotto del giunto antivibrante, una controchiave. Non To install the threaded types, it is suggested the use of one
provocare sollecitazioni torsionali al soffietto. common pipe-screwing ,and, the use of one counter-key to
handle the turning nipples to be fitted to the coupling's
Prima dell'installazione, verificare che eventuali connection. Take care to avoid torsions to the bellow.
scostamenti assiali, angolari-laterali delle tubazioni, siano
entro i valori massimi indicati nelle tabelle, considerando Before the installation, be careful that eventual axial,
anche, tramite calcoli, le dilatazioni termiche delle angolar-lateral pipes deviations , are still into the max.
tubazioni. E' molto importante considerare anche il fattore values stated on the table, even by taking into account,
pressione; per evitare che il giunto si deformi through proper calculations, the termic pipes expansions.
eccessivamente, montare sulle tubazioni adeguati supporti The pressure factor is still very important, to avoid that the
a slitta da fissare al pavimento o alla parete. coupling will extremely get distorted so, it is suggested to fit
on the pipes proper sliding supports fixed on the floor or on
TUTTE LE OPERAZIONI DI INSTALLAZIONE E the wall.
MANUTENZIONE DEVONO ESSERE ESEGUITE
ESCLUSIVAMENTE DA PERSONALE QUALIFICATO. ALL INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
MUST BE CARRIED OUT SOLELY BY QUALIFIED
PERSONNEL.
In conformit alla Direttiva 97/23/CE According to the 97/23/CE regulation
Omologazioni per altri paesi disponibili. Other countries homologations available.
Tipo/Type GA Tipo/Type GAF


GIUNTI ANTIVIBRANTI / GAS COMPENSATOR JOINTS
Dimensioni dingombro/Overall dimensions
Tipo/Type GA
LT 3
A h
e

Tipo Attacchi P1 max. Temp. Compensazione assiale Angolare Laterale Ingombro

Type Connection Axial compensation Angular Lateral Dimensions
GA UNI ISO 7-1 bar C h+ h- h tot. e A LT 5
GA1556 R. 1/2" 3 -20 +60 10 10 20 35 5 18 170
GA1544 R. 3/4" 3 -20 +60 10 10 20 30 5 18 180
GA1545 R. 1" 3 -20 +60 10 10 20 25 6 22 200
GA1546 R. 1"1/4 3 -20 +60 12 12 24 35 10 24 220
GA1547 R. 1"1/2 3 -20 +60 15 15 30 35 10 24 240
GA1548 R. 2" 3 -20 +60 15 15 30 30 10 28 240
Tipo/Type GA
S
e
DR
DE

LT
Tipo Attacchi P1 max. Temp. Compensazione assiale Angolare Laterale Ingombro

Type Connection Axial compensation Angular Lateral Dimensions
GAF ISO 7005-2 bar C h+ h- h tot. e DE DR LT 5 S
GAF212 DN 65 PN16 3 -20 +60 20 20 40 20 10 185 145 150 18
GAF300 DN 80 PN16 3 -20 +60 20 20 40 20 10 200 160 160 20
GAF400 DN 100 PN16 3 -20 +60 20 20 40 20 10 220 180 170 23
GAF500 DN 125 PN16 3 -20 +60 25 25 50 4 6 250 210 240 24
GAF600 DN 150 PN16 3 -20 +60 25 25 50 4 6 285 240 240 24
GIUNTI ANTIVIBRANTI / GAS COMPENSATOR JOINTS A Company of Watts Industries Europe B.V.
Diagramma portate - Perdite di carico/Diagram of flow rates - Pressure drops
DN100
DN125
1.1/4
1.1/2
DN65
DN80
3/4
1/2
2
50
40
30
DN150
20
15
p (mbar)
10
5
4
1
1 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 70 100 150 200 300 400 500 800 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 4000 6000
2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 70 100 150 200 300 400 500 800 1000 2000 3000 5000 7000
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 70 100 150 200 300 400 500 700 1000 2000 3000 5000 7000
4 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 70 100 150 200 300 400 500 700 1000 2000 3000 5000 7000 10000
3
Q (m /h)
1 Metano - Methane dv: 0,62

2 Gas citt - Town gas dv: 0,45
3 Aria - Air dv: 1
4 G.P.L. - L.P.G. dv: 1,56
Le descrizioni e le fotografie contenute nel presente, si intendono fornite a semplice titolo informativo e non impegnativo.
Re-order no. 64-0055-I-UK-IT/3-04-09-Rev.1
Giuliani Anello si riserva il diritto di apportare, senza alcun preavviso, qualsiasi modifica tecnica ed estetica ai propri prodotti.
The descriptions and photographs contained in this product specification sheet are supplied by way of information only and are not binding.
Giuliani Anello reserves the right to carry out any technical and design improvements to its products without prior notice.
Giuliani Anello S.r.l.

Via F.lli Bandiera, 8 - 44042 Cento (FE) - Italy
Phone +39 051.901.124
Fax +39 051.901.405
e-mail: giulianianello@giulianianello.it
www.giulianianello.com
Compact pressure
switches
for gas and air
GWA6
GWA6/1
Double pressure switch

GWA6 / GWA6
5.01
Technical description Approvals

The pressure switch GWA6 and the EC type test approval as per EC Gas
double pressure switch GWA6/ Appliance Directive:
GWA6 are adjustable compact
pressure switches for firing systems. GW...A6 CE-0085 AO 0012
They are suited for switching a circuit
Printed in Germany Rsler Druck Edition 10.02 Nr. 229 544
on, off or over if the actual pressure EC type test approval as per EC Pres-
value changes compared to the sure Appliance Directive:
setpoint.
The setpoint (switching point) is set on GW...A6 CE0063
an adjusting wheel with scale. A test
nipple is integrated in the metal hous- Approvals in other important gas-con-
ing as standard. suming countries.
Application TV (German Technical Inspectorate)

Pressure monitoring in combustion, test as pressure switch; special con-
ventilation and air-conditioning tech- struction type as per TRD 604 and
nologies. VdTV leaflet, Edition 100/1, as well
Suitable for gases of families 1,2,3 and as Class S as per EN 1854.
other neutral gaseous media.
16
Functional description GWA6 pressure switch
Switching function
Single-acting pressure switch in The control unit responds to pressure.
overpressure range. If the setpoint is exceeded or under-
If pressure increases:
The pressure switches operate with- shot, the circuit is switched on, off or
1 NC opens, 2 NO closes.
out any power supply. over.
If pressure drops:
1 NC closes, 2 NO opens.
Switching response GWA6 / GWA6 double pressure
GWA6 switch
Short response time during pressure Combination of two flanged GW...A6
fluctuations. single pressure switches. The two 2 NO
setpoints are set separately and inde- COM
GWA6/1 pendently. A combination of different
Slow response time during short-term setpoint ranges is therefore possible.
pressure fluctuations by additional The two control units are fed from the
3
damping nozzle. same medium at the mediums pres- 1 NC
sure.
p
Definition of p switching differ-

ence
Pressure at
The p switching difference is the control unit
pressure difference between the Setting tolerance
upper and lower switching pres-
Adjustment when
p switching difference
upper switching
pressure drops
sure. pressure
falling
lower switching
rising
pressure
26
Specifications
Max. operating pressure GW 3 A6 - GW 150 A6 500 mbar (50 kPa)

GW 500 A6 600 mbar (60 kPa)
Pressure connection Standard: centrally on housing bottom, G 1/4 inner thread

as per ISO 228
Special design: additionally G 1/4 inner thread (side right)
Measuring connection Test nipple integrated in metal housing 9
Temperature range Ambient temperature -15 C to +70 C

Medium temperatue -15 C to +70 C
Storage temperature -30 C to +80 C
Materials Housing: Aluminium die cast

Switch part: Polyamide
Diaphragms: NBR
Switching contact: Ag (Fine silver)
Switching voltage AC eff. min. 24 V max. 250 V

DC min. 24 V max. 48 V
Nominal voltage GW 10500 A6 GW 3 A6

AC eff. max.10 A AC eff. max. 6 A
Switching current AC eff. max.6 A at cos 1 AC eff. max. 4 A at cos 1

AC eff. max.3 A at cos 0,6 AC eff. max. 2 A at cos 0,6
AC eff. min. 20 mA AC eff. min. 20 mA
DC min. 20 mA DC min. 20 mA
DC max. 1 A DC max. 1 A
Electrical connection Terminal connection for line sockets as per DIN EN 175 301-803, 3-pin,
protection-insulated without ground connection
Degree of protection IP 54 as per IEC 529 (EN 60529)
Setting tolerance 15% switch point deviation referred to setpoint, adjusted for dropping
pressure, vertical diaphragm position
Mounting options GWA6

Safety solenoid valve
SV- 505-520
Pressure tap GWA6
mounting possible
1 no
2 no Pressure tap 4
Pressure tap 3
Pressure tap 1
3 pe (p1)
4 pa (p2) Pressure tap 2
36
Dimensions [mm]
GW A6, A6/1 Pressure connection, optional GW A6 / GW A6

with damping nozzle in GWA6/1
5,2
Optional
27,4
34
43
Pressure connection G 1/4
53,75
73
Socket hex screw
M5 x 12 DIN EN ISO 4 762 Hex nut M5 DIN EN ISO 1054
12,5 Sealing screw

G 1/4 with seal
Pressure
connection G 1/4
2
3
4,2
1
58,4
39,2
10,3
18
Test nipple 9
Sealing screw
Oblong slot 1,0 Plug for G 1/4
pressure connection
72
2 2
3 3
1 1
58,4
42
Made in Germany
Sealing screw
26
IP 54
G 1/4 with seal
146
Terminal connector for line
Seal socket as per DIN EN 175 301-803 O-ring
Protective cover for terminal Plug for G 1/4 pressure connection
connector
Installation position
Standard installation position; if a different installation position is used,

pay attention to the changed operating points:
2
1
GW 350 A6 approx. 0,6 mbar

GW 150 A6 approx. 1 mbar
GW 500 A6 approx. 3 mbar
1
3
When installed horizontally, the pressure switch switches at a pressure
higher.
When installed horizontally overhead, the pressure switch switches at a

1
3
2
pressure lower.
2
3 When installed in an intermediate installation position, the pressure
1
switch switches at pressure deviating from the set reference value.

46
Designation GW 150 A6 [Ag-G3-MS9-V0-VS3]
12 Pressure connection
V0 Pressure connection G 1/4
Position 0
V3 Pressure connection G 1/4
Position 3
9 Made in Germany
0 3 Sealing screw
VS0 Sealing screw at
IP 54
position 0
VS3 Sealing screw at
position 3
Test nipple
6 MS9 Test nipple at position 9
Electrical connection
Order example G3 Equipment connector, 3-pin,
protection-insulated, w/o grounding
Pressure switch design Contact material

Ag Fine silver (standard)
Setting range
10 - 150 mbar
Setting ranges [mbar] GW
Contact material 3 0,7 - 3 X
10 2 - 10 X
Ag fine silver 50 5 - 50 X
Electrical connection 150 10 - 150 X
500 100 - 500 X
Equipment connector
Pressure switch design
Pressure connection GW A6 Pressure switch
G 1/4 at position 0 switches when the
setpoint is exceeded or
Test nipple undershot.
MS 9 GW A6/1 Pressure switch with

damping nozzle
Sealing screw switches on if the set
value is exceeded or
At position 3 undershot
GW 150 A6 [Ag-G3-MS9-V0-VS3]
Accessories for GW A6
pressure switch
Line sockets, 3-pin + grounding, 210 318

grey GDMW
Test nipple G 1/4 230 398

with sealing ring
Sealing screw G 1/4 230 396

with sealing ring
Mounting kit for double pressure switch 213 910
Mounting bracket, metal 230 288
Mounting kit GWA6 (for fitting to SV) 242 771
56
Compact pressure switches
for gas and air
GWA6
GWA6/1
Double pressure switch

GWA6 / GWA6
Short technical overview 1 mbar = 100 Pa = 0,1 kPa 10 mm WS 1 Pa = 0,01 mbar 0,1 mm WS
Type Design Order Setting Switching
[Ag-G3-MS9-V0] number range difference
[mbar] p [mbar]
GWA6 GW 3 A6 228 723 0,7 - 3

pressure GW 10 A6 228 724 2 - 10 0,7
switch GW 50 A6 228 725 5 - 50 1
GW 150 A6 228 726 10 - 150 2,5
GW 500 A6 228 727 100 - 500 5
15
Supplied in collective packaging

[Ag-G3-MS9-V0-VS3] number range difference
[mbar] p [mbar]
GWA6 GW 3 A6 231 111 0,7 - 3 0,7

pressure GW 10 A6 231 112 2 - 10 1
switch GW 50 A6 231 113 5 - 50 2,5
GW 150 A6 231 114 10 - 150 5
GW 500 A6 231 115 100 - 500 15
Supplied in separate packaging, including line socket

[Ag-G3-MS9-V0-VS3] number range difference
[mbar] p [mbar]
GW A6 min. / GW 3 / 3 A6 229 235 0,7 - 3 0,7 0,7

GW A6 max. GW 3 / 10 A6 229 236 0,7 - 3 2 - 10 0,7 1
double GW 10 / 10 A6 229 237 2 - 10 1 1
pressure GW 10 / 50 A6 229 238 2 - 10 5 - 50 1 2,5
switch GW 10 / 150 A6 229 239 2 - 10 10 - 150 1 5
GW 50 / 50 A6 229 240 5 - 50 2,5 2,5
GW 50 / 150 A6 229 241 5 - 50 10 - 150 2,5 5
GW 150 / 150 A6 229 242 10 - 150 5 5
GW 500 / 500 A6 229 243 100 - 500 15 15
We reserve the right to make any changes in the interest of technical progress.
Head Offices and Factory Postal address

Karl Dungs GmbH & Co. Karl Dungs GmbH & Co.
Siemensstrae 6-10 Postfach 12 29
D-73660 Urbach, Germany D-73602 Schorndorf, Germany
Telefon +49 (0)7181-804-0 e-mail info@dungs.com
Telefax +49 (0)7181-804-166 Internet www.dungs.com 66
7 451
ISO 9001
Gas Burner Controls LFL1...

Gas burner controls
for gas, oil or dual-fuel forced draft burners of medium to high capacity
for multistage or modulating burners in intermittent operation; for safety rea-
sons, at least one controlled shutdown must take place every 24 hours
with checked air damper control
flame supervision
with UV detectors QRA...
with ionization probe
The LFL1... and this Data Sheet are intended for use by OEMs which integrate the
burner controls in their products.
Use
- Control and supervision of forced draft burners of expanding flame and interrupted
pilot construction
- For medium to high capacity
- For intermittent operation (at least one controlled shutdown every 24 hours)
- Universally applicable for multistage or modulating burners
- For use with dual-fuel burners
- For use with stationary air heaters
The difference between 01 series and 02 series is the duration of the safety time for the
pilot burner of burners equipped with pilot gas valves.
For atmospheric burners of high capacity, LFL1.638 is the type to be employed.
For burner controls for use with burners in continuous operation, refer to Data Sheet
7785 (LGK16...).
CC1N7451en
Warning notes

warning notes should be observed!
Do not open, interfere with or modify the unit!
Before performing any wiring changes in the connection area of the LFL1, com-
pletely isolate the unit from the mains supply (all-polar disconnection)
Ensure protection against electric shock hazard by providing adequate protection
for the burner controls connection terminals
Check to ensure that wiring is in an orderly state
Press the lockout reset button only manually (apply a force of no more than 10 N),
without using any tools or pointed objects
Do not press the lockout reset button on the unit or the remote lockout reset
button for more than 10 seconds since this damages the lockout relay in the
unit
Fall or shock can adversely affect the safety functions. Such units may not be put
into operation, even if they do not exhibit any damage
In the case of flame supervision with UV detectors QRA..., it should be noted that
sources of radiation such as halogen lamps, welding equipment, special lamps, ig-
nition sparks, as well as X-rays and gamma radiation, can produce erroneous
flame signals
2/20

Engineering notes
Install switches, fuses, earthing, etc., in compliance with local regulations
Decisive for the connection of valves and other plant components is the plant diagram provided by the burner manufacturer
A z m a
t7 t16
t10
t11
P
t1
t3
t12
t3
TSA TSA
t4 1
t4
t9
t5 2
t5
B
AS C
D t6 t13
A
1 2 21 3 13 12 14 4 5 6 7 16 17 18 19 20 9 11 10 8 22 23 24
LR
+
d1 d2 QRA...
bv... W GP
SB 1
SA v a z m
R N N
M
3)
EK2 22 23 24
H TSA, t3, t4, nur bei:
BV1 BV2 BV3 LFL1.335,
M1 M2 Z LFL1.635 und
LK FE
S AL LP LFL1.638
L ZBV BV1 BV2
N
1 2 3 4 5 7451a02/0602 6 7
c Connect safety limit thermostat in the line (manual reset, e.g. SB)
d Remote reset
When remote reset button EK2 is connected to
- terminal 3, only remote reset is possible
- terminal 1, both remote emergency shutdown and remote reset are possible
e Required switching capacities
- of the switching devices connected between terminals 12 and 4 (refer to Technical data)
- of the switching devices connected between terminals 4 and 14 (refer to Technical data)
- depending on the loads applied to terminals 16...19 (refer to Technical data)
f Air pressure supervision

If the air pressure is not monitored by means of air pressure switch LP, terminal 4 must be connected to terminal 12, and
terminal 6 to terminal 14. Terminal 13 is not used.
Control contacts of the other devices in the burner installation if series-connected are to be connected as follows:
- To terminal 4 or 5 contacts which must be closed from startup to controlled shutdown otherwise no start or shutdown
- To terminal 12 contacts which must only be closed on startup otherwise no start
- To terminal 14 contacts which must be closed at the beginning of the preignition time at the latest, and which must stay
closed until controlled shutdown occurs otherwise lockout; this applies to both long and short preignition
g Connection of fuel valves with expanding flame burners. With 2-stage burners, BV2 is connected in place of BV3
Connection of fuel valves with interrupted pilot burners
Direct connection of a fuel valve to terminal 20 is only permitted
- in plants with a main shutoff valve on the mains side (safety shutoff valve), which is controlled by terminal 18 or 19, and
- if 2-stage valves are used, provided they fully close when the first stage, controlled by terminal 18 or 19, is switched off
h For additional examples of air damper control, refer to Connection examples. In the case of actuators with no end switch
z for the fully closed position of the air damper, terminal 11 must be connected to terminal 10 otherwise no burner start.
i Simultaneous use of ionization and UV supervision is possible
3/20

Mounting notes
Ensure that the relevant national safety regulations are observed

Mounting work must be carried out by qualified staff
When using 2 UV detectors QRA..., make certain that the detectors cannot see one
another
Installation notes
Installation work must be carried out by qualified staff

Always run the high-voltage ignition cables separately while observing the greatest
possible distance to the unit and to other cables
Do not mix up live and neutral conductors
Electrical connection of ionization probe and flame detector
It is important to achieve practically disturbance- and loss-free signal transmission:

Never run the detector cable together with other cables
Line capacitance reduces the magnitude of the flame signal
Use a separate cable of low capacitance
Observe the maximum permissible detector cable lengths (refer to Technical
data)
2 UV detectors QRA... can be connected in parallel
The ionization probe is not protected against electric shock hazard
Locate the ignition electrode and ionization probe such that the ignition spark can-
not arc over to the ionization probe (risk of electrical overloads)
In connection with the QRA..., earthing of terminal 22 is mandatory
Supervision with both ionization probe and UV detector QRA... is possible, but for
safety reasons with the exception of the second safety time t9 only one flame
detector may be active at a time. At the end of the second safety time, one of the
detectors must be inactive, however, that is, the detected flame must have extin-
guished, e.g. by switching off the ignition valve at terminal 17
Commissioning notes
Commissioning work must be carried out by qualified staff

Prior to commissioning, check to ensure that wiring is in an orderly state
When commissioning the plant or when doing maintenance work, make the follow-
ing safety checks:
Safety check to be carried out Anticipated response

a) Burner start with flame detector dark- Lockout at the end of TSA
ened
b) Burner start with flame detector ex- Lockout after 40 seconds at the
posed to extraneous light latest
c) Burner operation with simulated loss Lockout
of flame; for that purpose, darken the
flame detector in operation and main-
tain that state (not possible with ioni-
zation)
4/20

Certificate
Conformity to EEC directives

- Electromagnetic compatibility EMC (immunity) 89 / 336 EEC
- Low-voltage directive 73 / 23 EEC
ISO 9001: 2000 ISO 14001: 1996

Cert. 00739 Cert. 38233
Type
LFL1.122 x --- x x x x
LFL1.133 x --- x x --- x
LFL1.322 x --- x x x x
LFL1.333 x --- x x x x
LFL1.335 x x x x x x
LFL1.622 x --- x x x x
LFL1.635 x --- x x x x
LFL1.638 x --- x --- x ---
Identification code to EN 298

All types (except LFL1.148) FBLLXN
Service notes
Maintenance work must be carried out by qualified staff

Each time a unit has been replaced, check to ensure that wiring is in an orderly
state. Make the safety check in accordance with section Commissioning notes
Disposal notes
The unit contains electrical and electronic components and may not be disposed of
together with household waste.
5/20

Mechanical design
Gas burner control - Plug-in design

- Exchangeable unit fuse (incl. spare fuse)
Housing - Made of impact-proof and heat-resistant black plastic

- Lockout reset button with viewing window showing
the fault signal lamp
the lockout indicator
- coupled to the program spindle
- visible in the transparent lockout reset button
- uses easy-to-remember symbols to indicate the type of fault and the time
lockout occurred
Plug-in base - Plug-in base and connectors of the LFL1... are designed such that only LFL1...
type burner controls can be plugged in
- With 24 connection terminals
- With auxiliary terminals 31 and 32
- With 3 earthing terminals, joining in a lug for earthing the burner
- With 3 neutral conductor terminals
prewired to terminal 2
- With 14 knockout holes for cable entry with cable entry glands
8 at the side
6 in the floor
- With 6 lateral threaded knockout holes for cable entry glands Pg11 or M16
Type summary
Switching times are given in seconds, in the burner startup sequence, valid for 50 Hz mains frequency. At 60 Hz, the switching
times are about 17 % shorter.
Preferred use for / in:

Flash steam Flash steam D (incl. sta- A GB F B Large at-
generators generators tionary air D I NL ) mospheric
heaters) burners
F
LFL1.122 ) LFL1.133 ) LFL1.322 ) LFL1.333 ) LFL1.335 ) LFL1.622 ) LFL1.635 ) LFL1.638 01
02 series 02 series 02 series 02 series 01 series 02 series 01 series series
t1 10 9 36 31.5 37.5 66 67.5 67.5
TSA 2 3 2 3 2.5 2 2.5 2.5
TSA --- --- --- --- 5 --- 5 5
t3 4 3 4 6 5 4 5 5
t3 --- --- --- --- 2.5 --- 2.5 2.5
t4 6 6 10 12 12.5 10 12.5 12.5
t4 --- --- --- --- 15 --- 15 15
t5 4 3 10 12 12.5 10 12.5 12.5
t6 10 14.5 12 18 15 12 15 15
t7 2 3 2 3 2.5 2 2.5 2.5
t8 30 29 60 72 78 96 105 105
t9 2 3 2 3 5 2 5 7.5
t10 6 6 8 12 10 8 10 10
t11 Optional
t12 Optional
t13 10 14,5 12 18 15 12 15 15
t16 4 3 4 6 5 4 5 5
t20 32 60 --- 27 22.5 --- --- ---
) Available as AC 100...110 V versions; add type suffix 110 V when ordering

) Reversed polarity protection conforming to Dutch installation standard: AGM30
6/20

Ordering
When ordering, please give type reference according to Type summary.
Accessories
Plug-in bases
- With Pg11 threads for cable entry glands AGM410490550
- With M16 threads for cable entry glands AGM14.1
Technical data
General unit data Mains voltage AC 230 V 15 / +10 %
LFL1... AC 100 V 15 %...AC 110 V +10 %
Unit fuse (built-in) T6,3H250V to DIN EN 60 127
Primary fuse (external) max. 10 A (slow)
Weight
- LFL1... approx. 1,000 g
- Plug-in base approx. 165 g
Flame detectors
- QRA... refer to Data Sheet 7712
- Ionization probe to be supplied by thirds
Power consumption approx. AC 3.5 VA
Mounting position optional
Degree of protection IP 40, with the exception of the connection
area
Perm. input current at terminal 1 max. 5 A continuously, peaks up to 20 A for
20 ms
Perm. load on control terminals 3, 6, 7, max. 4 A continuously, peaks up to 20 A for
9...11, 15...20 max. 20 ms, total max. 5 A
Required switching capacity of switching
devices 1 A, AC 250 V
- Between terminals 4 and 5 1 A, AC 250 V
- Between terminals 4 and 12 min. 1 A, AC 250 V
- Between terminals 4 and 14 depending on the load on terminals 16...19
Plug-in base AGM... Degree of protection IP 00

Cable connection (stranded wires require screw terminals for min. 0.5 mm and max.
ferrules) 1.5 mm cross-sectional area
Ferrules suited for the respective cross-sectional
area
Environmental Transport DIN EN 60721-3-2

Operation DIN EN 60 721-3-3
7/20

Flame supervision with Voltage at the ionization probe
ionization probe - Operation AC 330 V 10 %
- Test AC 380 V 10 %
Short-circuit current max. 0.5 mA
Required ionization current min. 6 A
Recommended range of measuring 0...50 A
instrument
Perm. length of detector cable
- Normal cable, laid separately ) max. 80 m
- Shielded cable max. 140 m (e.g. high-frequency cable;
shield connected to terminal 22)
Flame supervision Supply voltage

with QRA... - Operation AC 330 V 10 %
- Test AC 380 V 10 %
Required detector current min. 70 A
Possible detector current
- Operation max. 680 A
- Test max. 1000 A )
Perm. length of detector cable
- Normal cable, laid separately ) max. 100 m
- Shielded cable max. 200 m (e.g. high-frequency cable;
shield connected to terminal 22)
) During the prepurge time with higher test voltage: Self-ignition and extraneous light test
) Multicore cable not permitted
Measuring circuit for Ionization probe QRA...

detector current
measurement M
+ -
M - + 23 22 LFL1...
+ A
LFL1... 24
C
FE - C
7451v01/0503
+ 7451v02/0503
For detector currents, refer to Technical data.
Legend C Electrolytic condenser 100...470 F; DC 10...25 V

FE Ionization probe
M Microammeter Ri max. 5,000
8/20

Function
2-stage expanding flame burner Modulating expanding flame burner
A B C D A B C D
TP R T R
P
t7 t1 t6 t7 t1 t6
M1 M1
M M2 M
~
~ M2
t3 t3
Z Z
TSA TSA
BV1 BV1
t4 t4
R LR R LR
t5
t11 t12 t5
100%
M M 100%
min.
LK 0... LK min.
BV2 0...
t11 t12
t13 RV
FS t13
7451a06/0600
FS
7451a07/0600
2-stage interrupted pilot burner

A B C D
TP R
Legend
t7 t1 t6
M1
M
~ M2
BV... Fuel valve
t3 FS Flame signal amplifier
Z
TSA LK Air damper
ZBV LR Load controller
t4 t9
BV1
M... Fan or burner motor
R LR
R Control thermostat or pressurestat
t5 RV Modulating fuel valve
100%
M
min.
Z Ignition transformer
LK
0...
BV2
t11 t12 t13
FS
7451a08/0202
General The following features enable the LFL1... to offer a high level of additional safety:
- Detector and extraneous light test are resumed immediately on completion of the
afterburn time t13. Fuel valves that are not closed, or not fully closed, immedi-
ately initiate lockout on completion of the afterburn time t13. The test will only be
terminated when the prepurge time t1 of the next startup sequence has elapsed
- The proper functioning of the flame supervision circuit is automatically checked
during each startup phase of the burner
- During the postpurge time t6, the control contacts for the release of fuel are
checked to ensure they have not welded
- The built-in unit fuse protects the control contacts against overloads
9/20

Control of the burner - Burner operation with or without postpurging
- Fan motors with a current draw of up to 4 A can be connected directly starting
current max. 20 A (max. 20 ms)
- Separate control outputs for
- one pilot valve, which will be shut on completion of the second safety time
- Separate control outputs for the actuators positioning directions OPEN, CLOSE
and MIN
- Checked air damper control to ensure prepurging with the nominal amount of air
- Checked positions:
- CLOSED or MIN on startup low-fire position
- OPEN at the start of prepurging
- MIN on completion of prepurging
If the actuator does not drive the air damper to the required position, the burner
startup sequence will be stopped
- 2 control outputs for the release of the second and third output stage, or load con-
trol
- When load control is enabled, the control outputs for the actuator will galvanically
be separated from the units control section
- Connection facilities for
- remote lockout warning device
- remote reset
- remote emergency shutdown
- With burner controls of the 01 series and expanding flame burners, the safety time
can be increased from 2.5 to 5 seconds by changing the circuitry (refer to Con-
nection examples), provided the longer safety time conforms to local safety regu-
lations
Flame supervision - With the ionization probe, in networks with earthed or nonearthed neutral conduc-
tor. For this kind of supervision, the flame supervision circuit is designed such that
possible disturbances of the ionization current due to the ignition spark normally
have no impact on the establishment of the flame signal. A short-circuit between
ionization probe and burner ground cannot simulate a flame signal
- With UV detector QRA... (gas and oil burners)
- Simultaneous use of ionization probe and QRA... (e.g. with interrupted pilot burners
or gas-electrically ignited oil burners)
Preconditions - If, on startup, the required input signals are not present, the burner control inter-
for startup rupts the startup sequence at the points marked by symbols and initiates lockout
where required by safety regulations. The symbols used in this Data Sheet corre-
spond to those on the burner controls lockout indicator.
Preconditions for - Burner control must be reset

burner startup - Sequence switch must be in its start position
voltage at terminals 4 and 11 present
Air damper closed
- End switch z for the CLOSED position must feed voltage from terminal 11 to
terminal 8
- The contacts of control thermostat or pressurestat W and other contacts of
switching devices connected between terminal 12 and LP must be closed e.g.
control contact for the oil preheaters temperature
- Terminal 4 must be live
- The N.C. contact of the air pressure switch must be closed LP test
10/20

Startup sequence
Sequence A Start command (delivered by R for instance)
A-B Startup sequence
B Operating position of the burner
B-C Burner operation (according to the control commands delivered by R)
C Controlled shutdown via R
C-D Sequence switch travels to start position A, postpurging
During burner off periods, only control outputs 11 and 12 carry voltage and the
air damper is in its CLOSED position as defined by end switch z of the ac-
tuator. Also, in order to perform the detector and extraneous light test, the flame
supervision circuit is live (terminals 22 / 23 and 22 / 24)
A Start command delivered by R

R closes the start control loop between terminals 4 and 5
- The sequence switch starts running
- Only prepurging, power is immediately fed to the fan motor connected
to terminal 6
- Pre- and postpurging; on completion of t7, power is fed to the fan mo-
tor or flue gas fan connected to terminal 7
- On completion of t16, the control command to open the air damper is
delivered via terminal 9
- No power is fed to terminal 8 during the positioning time
- The sequence switch continues its travel only after the air damper has fully
opened
t1 Prepurge time with air damper fully open

- During t1, the correct functioning of the flame supervision circuit is tested
- If test is not successful, the burner control will initiate lockout
Shortly after the start of t1, the air pressure switch must change over from
terminal 13 to terminal 14.
Otherwise lockout
Start of air pressure check
At the same time, terminal 14 must be live since the ignition transformer will be
powered and the fuel released via this current path.
On completion of the prepurge time, the burner control will drive the air damper
to the low-fire position via terminal 10, which is determined by the changeover
point of auxiliary switch m. During the positioning time, the sequence switch
stops again. A short time later, the motor of the sequence switch will be
switched to the control section of the burner control. This means that, from now
on, positioning signals delivered to terminal 8 have no impact on the burners
further startup sequence (and on subsequent burner operation):
t5 Interval
- On completion of t5, power is fed to terminal 20; at the same time, con-
trol outputs 9...11 and input 8 are galvanically separated from the units
control section
The LFL1... is now protected against return voltages from the power
control loop
- The startup sequence of the LFL1 ends with the release of LR at ter-
minal 20
- After a number of idle steps (steps with no change of the contact position),
the sequence switch switches itself off
11/20

Expanding flame TSA Ignition safety time
burners On completion of TSA, a flame signal must be present at terminal 22. It must
not be interrupted until controlled shutdown takes place otherwise lockout
t3 Preignition time
Release of fuel via terminal 18
t4 Interval BV1 BV2 or BV1 - LR

- On completion of t4, terminal 19 is live
- That powers BV2 connected to the actuators auxiliary switch v
Interrupted pilot t3 Preignition time

burners t3 Release of fuel for pilot burner via terminal 17
TSA Ignition safety time

TSA On completion of TSA, a flame signal must be present at terminal 22. It must
not be interrupted until controlled shutdown takes place otherwise lockout
t4 Interval ZBV-BV1
t4 Up to the release of the fuel valve at terminal 19 for the main burners start load
t9 Second safety time

On completion of the second safety time, the main burner must have been ig-
nited by the pilot burner since terminal 17 becomes dead as soon as this time
has elapsed, causing the pilot valve to close
B Operating position of the burner
B-C Burner operation

- During burner operation, LR drives the air damper to the high-fire or low-
fire position, depending on the demand for heat
- Release of high-fire is enabled by auxiliary switch v in the actuator
- In the event of loss of flame during operation, the LFL1 will initiate lockout
C Controlled shutdown
On controlled shutdown, the BV... will immediately be closed. At the same
time, the sequence switch starts and programs t6
C-D The sequence switch travels to start position A
t6 Postpurge time
- Fan M2 connected to terminal 7
- Shortly after the start of t6, power is fed to terminal 10
air damper will be driven to the MIN position
- Full closing of the air damper starts only shortly before t6 has elapsed
triggered by the control signal at terminal 11
- During the following burner off period, terminal 11 remains live
t13 Permissible afterburn time

During t13, the flame signal input can still receive a flame signal
no lockout
12/20

D-A End of control sequence
start position
As soon as the sequence switch has reached the start position thereby
switching itself off the flame detector and extraneous light test will start again.
During the burner off periods, the flame supervision circuit is live.
A faulty flame signal of a few seconds will initiate lockout.
Short ignition pulses of the UV tube, caused for instance by cosmic radiation, do
not lead to lockout.
Times TSA, t3 and t4 only exist with burner controls of the 01 series.
13/20

Control sequence under fault conditions and lockout indication
In the event of any kind of fault, the sequence switch will stop and, with it, the lockout indicator.
The symbol above the indicators reading mark gives the type of fault:
No start One of the contacts is not closed (also refer to Preconditions for burner startup)
Extraneous light
Lockout during or after completion of the control sequence.
Examples:
Flames that have not extinguished
Leaking fuel valves
Defect in the flame supervision circuit
= Interruption of Terminal 8 has not received the OPEN signal from end switch a
startup sequence Terminals 6, 7 and 14 remain live until the fault has been corrected
P Lockout No indication of air pressure at the beginning of the air pressure check
Loss of air pressure after the air pressure check
Lockout Defect in the flame supervision circuit
> Interruption of Terminal 8 has not received the positioning signal from auxiliary switch m for the
startup sequence low-fire position
Terminals 6, 7 and 14 remain live until the fault has been corrected
1 Lockout No flame signal on completion of safety time TSA
2 Lockout No flame signal on completion of the second safety time (flame signal of main flame
with interrupted pilot burners)
I Lockout Loss of flame signal during operation
If lockout occurs any other moment in time between start and preignition not indicated
by a symbol, the usual cause is a premature flame signal, that is, a faulty flame signal,
caused for instance by a self-igniting UV tube.
Lockout indicator a-b Startup sequence
b-b Idle steps

(with no contact confirmation)
b (b)-a Postpurge program
LFL1... 01 series LFL1... 02 series
If lockout occurs, the burner control can immediately be reset:

Do not press the lockout reset button for more than 10 seconds
The sequence switch always returns to its start position first
After resetting
After correction of a fault which resulted in plant shutdown
After each power failure
During that period of time, power is only fed to terminals 7 and 9...11.
Then, the LFL1... begins with a new burner startup sequence
14/20

Connection diagrams (for circuit variants, refer to Connection examples)
A z m a
t7 t16
t10
t11
P
t1
t3
t12
t3
TSA TSA
t4 1
t4
t9
t5 2
t5
B
AS C
D t6 t13
A
1 2 21 3 13 12 14 4 5 6 7 16 17 18 19 20 9 11 10 8 22 23 24
LR
+
d1 d2 QRA...
bv... W GP
SB 1
SA v a z m
R N N
M
3)
EK2 22 23 24
H TSA, t3, t4, nur bei:
BV1 BV2 BV3
LFL1.335,
M1 M2 Z LFL1.635 und
LK FE
S AL LP LFL1.638
L ZBV BV1 BV2
N
1 2 3 4 5 7451a02/0602 6 7
Connection diagram
L S
H
SB
1
AS FE
br1
a b 22 23 24
ar2
ar1 I a XV
a b b
4 12 6 7
QRA...
W +
d1 d2
GP LP
22 23 24
R M1 M2
N
5 13 14 V
fr3 fr2 FR
fr1
a b b a
XI XIII (1) (2)
b a a b XII NTC
XIV a b
AR IV
a b
VII
3) br2 a b
EK1 VI V III ar3
L1 II X VIII
E M a b a b M
BR b a a b a b SM
A
3 21 2 15 16 17 18 19 20 9 11 10 8
LR
1 SA v a z m
AL Z M LK
3) BV1
BV2 7451a12/1100
EK2 ZBV BV1
H
N BV2
Do not press the lockout reset button for more than 10 seconds!
For the connection of the safety shutoff valve, refer to the plant diagram provided by
the burner manufacturer.
15/20

Program sequence
Steuerausgang
A B C t6 D auf Klemme:
t11 t1 t12
a 12
I b t7 7
t3 t4
a 19
II b 16
a 10
III b 9
IV
a 9
V b 11
t16
VI 20
a
VII b 8
TSA t20
a 18
VIII b *t3 *t4 t9
a 17
X b *TSA t5
a
XI b
a
XII b t10 t13
a
XIII b
a
XIV b
a 12
XV b 7
t8
7451d01/0202
Positionen der Strungsanzeige
LFL P 1 2
TSA, t3 and t4:

These times only apply to burner controls of the 01 series (LFL1.335, LFL1.635, and
LFL1.638). They do not apply to burner controls of the 02 series since cams X and VIII
of these types of LFL1 perform simultaneous switching actions.
16/20

Legend
a Changeover end switch for air dampers m Changeover auxiliary switch for the air
OPEN position dampers MIN position
AL Remote lockout warning device (alarm) M... Fan or burner motor
AR Load relay with contacts ar... NTC NTC resistor
AS Unit fuse QRA... UV detector
BR Lockout relay with contacts br... R Control thermostat or pressurestat
BV... Fuel valve RV Modulating fuel valve
bv... Control contact for the CLOSED position S Fuse
of gas valves SA Air damper actuator
d... Contactor or relay SB Safety limiter
EK... Lockout reset button SM Synchronous motor of sequence switch
FE Ionization probe v In the actuator: Changeover auxiliary switch
FR Flame relay with contacts fr.. For the position-dependent release of fuel
GP Gas pressure switch V Flame signal amplifier
H Main isolator W Limit thermostat or pressure switch
L1 Fault signal lamp z In the actuator: End switch for the air dampers
L3 Operational readiness indication CLOSED position
LK Air damper Z Ignition transformer
LP Air pressure switch ZBV Pilot gas valve
LR Load controller
Control signals of the LFL1...

Permissible input signals
Required input signals:
If these signals are not present during or , the burner control will interrupt the startup sequence or
initiate lockout
TSA Ignition safety time t8 Duration of startup sequence

TSA Ignition safety time or first safety time (without t11 and t12)
(startup with burners using pilot burners) t9 Second safety time with burners using pilot burners
t1 Prepurge time with air damper open t10 Interval from start to the beginning of the
t3 Preignition time air pressure check, excluding running time of air
t4 Interval between voltage at terminals 18 damper
and 19 t11 Air damper running time to the OPEN position
t4 Interval between start of TSA and t12 Air damper running time to the low-fire position
release of valve at terminal 19 MIN
t5 Interval between power at teminals 19 t13 Permissible afterburn time
and 20 t16 Interval until OPEN command for the air damper is
t6 Postpurge time (with M2) given
t7 Interval between start command and power t20 Interval to the self-shutdown of the sequence
at terminal 7 (start delay for M2) switch after startup
Valid for expanding flame burners

Valid for interrupted pilot burners
(1) Input for increasing the operating voltage for the QRA... (detector test)
(2) Input for forced energizing of the flame relay during the functional test of the flame supervision circuit (con-
tact XIV) and during safety time TSA (contact IV)
17/20

Connection examples
16 17 18 19
Doubling the safety time with ex- Only with burner controls of the 01
panding flame burners BV2 series.
Z BV1
N
7451a10/1295 This circuit change (linking terminals
17 and 18) reduces the preignition
time by 50 %.
Extension of the safety time is only permitted if in compliance with the rele-
vant national standards.
6 11 10 8
Burner without air damper If the case of burners with no air
damper (or with an air damper not
M controlled and monitored by the
N
7451a11/0396 burner control), terminals 8 and 6
must be linked, as otherwise the
burner control will not be able to start
the burner.
2-stage expanding flame burner Load control by a 2-position controller. The air damper is closed during
burner off periods.
16 17 18 19 9 20 11 10 8
LR L...
11 7 1 6 5 2 10 8 LR
SA
SA
IV I II III
M BV1/BV2
13 12 N 3 4 9
Z BV1 BV2 LK
N 7451a03/0396
A B C D
TP R
t7 t1 t6
M1
M
~ M2
t3
Z
TSA
BV1
t4
R LR
t5
100%
M
min.
LK 0...
BV2
t11 t12
t13
FS
7451a06/0600
Control of actuator SA according to the single-wire principle (actuator SA: E.g. SQN3... as per Data Sheet
7808). For other connections, refer to Connection diagrams.
18/20

Connection examples (contd)
Modulating expanding flame Load control by a modulating controller with galvanically separated control
burner contacts for the positioning directions OPEN or CLOSE.
16 17 18 19 20 9 11 10 8
L...
LR LR
N SA SA RV
a z m BV1
M
Z BV1 RV LK
N 7451a04/1295
A B C D
T R
P
t7 t1 t6
M1
M
~ M2
t3
Z
TSA
BV1
t4
R LR
t11 t12 t5
M 100%
LK min.
0...
RV
t13
FS
7451a07/0600
The air damper is kept closed during burner off periods. For other connections, refer to Connection diagrams.
2-stage interrupted pilot burner Controlled and supervised by a burner control of the 01 series.
(burner with pilot burner)
16 17 18 19 20 9 11 10 8
L...
LR
LR
ZBV SA SA
v a z m
M
BV1/BV2
ZBV
Z BV1 BV2 LK
N 7451a05/0496
A B C D
TP R
t7 t1 t6
M1
M
~ M2
t3
Z
TSA
ZBV
t4 t9
BV1
R LR
t5
100%
M
min.
LK
0...
BV2
t11 t12 t13
FS
7451a08/0202
The air damper is kept closed during burner off periods. For other connections, refer to Connection diagrams.
19/20

Dimensions
Dimensions in mm
LFL1... with plug-in

base AGM...
1,5
123
25 25
6
18,9
15,5
7,5
5
7
15 15 15
7451m02/0602
27,5 27,5
37
103
7,5
103
40 18,5 13,5 5,7

Plug-in base AGM... 5,2x6,7
(Pg11 or M16 threads)
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
12
51,5
7,5 18,9
5,7
11
40
10
9
12,8
1
8
31
7
15
4,4
6
26,8
5
51,5
4
25
N
1,
3
5
32
2
1
5,2 5,2x6,7
7451m01/0602
5,7 12,8 40
51,5 51,5
2003 Siemens Building Technologies

20/20 Subject to change!

64-0068-FGD-FGDR-FG1B 11-03-2010 13:26 Pagina 3
Regolatore di pressione di gas

Gas pressure governor
Serie FGD-FGDR-FG1B
Caratteristiche principali Main features
I regolatori di pressione di gas sono conformi alle The gas governors are conformity with EN 88
Norme EN 88 (Direttiva gas 2009/142/CE). standard (2009/142/CE gas regulation).
I regolatori sono idonei ad essere installati su The governors are suitable to systems'
impianti con bruciatori di gas automatico compresi installation with automatic gas burners including
quelli misti e combinati e su impianti di mixed and combined systems and to in industrial
distribuzione industriale. distribution systems.

64-0068-FG1B 11-03-2010 17:58 Pagina 4
REGOLATORE DI PRESSIONE DI GAS / GAS PRESSURE GOVERNOR

DATI TECNICI TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Campo di pressione d'entrata P1 : Inlet pressure range P1:
FGD ........................................ P2 + 5 mbar fino a 200 mbar FGD ........................................ P2 + 5 mbar up to 200 mbar
2 FGDR...................................... P2 + 30 mbar fino a 500mbar FGDR .................................... P2 + 30 mbar up to 500 mbar
FG1B ............................................ P2 + 30 mbar fino a 1 bar FG1B ............................................ P2 + 30 mbar up to 1 bar
Campo di lavoro P2 : fornito di serie con la molla neutra; Operating range P2 : neutral spring standard supply; other
campi di taratura secondo la tabella delle molle. ranges according to the spring table.
Norma di riferimento : Standard reference :
FGD - FGDR ............................................................ EN 88-1 FGD - FGDR .......................................................... EN 88-1
FG1B ........................................................................ EN 88-2 FG1B ...................................................................... EN 88-2
Classe di regolazione del regolatore : Governor class :
FGD - FGDR .......................................................... classe A FGD - FGDR ............................................................ class A
FG1B ................................................................ classe AC10 FG1B .................................................................. class AC10
Pressione di chiusura : Closing pressure :
FGD per questo modello non previsto il collaudo di chiusura FGD ........................ this model doesnt feature test closing
FGDR ............................................ secondo Norma EN88-1 FGDR .......................... in according with Standard EN 88-1
FG1B ................................................................ classe SG30 FG1B ................................................................ classe SG30
Gruppo del regolatore : ................................................ 2 Governor group : ............................................................ 2
Combustibili : gas delle tre famiglie: gas manifatturati (gas Fuel : gases of three families: manufactured gas (town gas);
citt); gas naturali (gruppo H - metano); gas di petrolio natural gas (group H - methane); liquefied petroleum gas
liquefatto (gpl); gas non aggressivi. (lpg); non-aggressive gas.
Temperatura ambiente : -15 C +60 C. Ambient temperature range : -15 C +60 C.
Resistenza meccanica : secondo Norme EN13611. Resistance: according to EN13611 specifications.
Funzionamento : con carico della molla, senza energia Operation : by tensioning the spring, without auxiliary energy.
ausiliaria. Construction features: compensation of inlet pressure,
Caratteristiche costruttive : compensazione della standard-supply safety diaphragm, internal pipe impulse.
pressione di entrata, membrana di sicurezza di serie, attacco Fast-seal gasket.
impulso interno. Guarnizione di tenuta per chiusura a zero. All models are supplied with inlet / outlet pipe tap fittings.
Prese di pressione in entrata e uscita su tutti i modelli. Material: aluminium body; inner parts in aluminium, steel,
Materiali : corpo in alluminio; parti interne in alluminio, brass and synthetic materials; diaphragm and gaskets in
acciaio, ottone e materiali sintetici; membrane e guarnizioni nitrile-butadiene rubber.
in materiale a base di gomma NBR. GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERALITA'
The gas governors are conform to the EN88 specifications
In conformit alle Norme EN88. In conformity with EN88 specification.
Dimensioni dingombro/Overall dimensions (mm) Tipo/Type FGD
N.B. La quota E deve essere aumentata di circa 400 mm per facilitare la pulizia e lispezione del filtro.
Note. The dimension "E" must be increased by about 400 mm to facilitate the filter cleaning and
inspection.
Modello/Model Attacchi/Connection A B C D E
FG..15 Rp 1/2" UNI-ISO 7/1
FG..20 Rp 3/4" UNI-ISO 7/1 146 73 58 137 42
FG..25 Rp 1" UNI-ISO 7/1
FG..32 Rp 1"1/4 UNI-ISO 7/1
FG..40 Rp 1"1/2 UNI-ISO 7/1 194 98 80 175 52
FG..50/40 Rp 2" UNI-ISO 7/1
FG..50 Rp 2" UNI-ISO 7/1 260 135 90 250 65
FG..50/40 : modello con attacchi filettatti da 2" ma con ingombri del modello da 1"1/2 (FG..40).
FG..50/40 : model with 2" connection but overall dimension as 1"1/2 models (FG..40)
GENERALITA' GENERAL INFORMATION

I regolatori di pressione di gas sono conformi alle Norme The gas governors are conform to the EN88
EN88 (Direttiva gas 2009/142/CE). specifications (2009/142/CE gas regulation).
I regolatori sono idonei ad essere installati su impianti con The governors are suitable to installation systems with
bruciatori di gas automatico compresi quelli misti e automatic gas burners including mixed and combined
combinati e su impianti di distribuzione industriale. systems and to industrial distribution systems.
CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE TECHNICAL FEATURES

Dispongono di tre membrane: di compensazione, di lavoro Compensation diaphragm, operating diaphragm and
e di sicurezza. Non indispensabile un condotto di sfiato e safety diaphragm: an external breather outlet pipe is not
scarico all'esterno poich la membrana di sicurezza necessary as the incorporated safety diaphragm ensures
incorporata garantisce che, in caso di rottura della that, in the event of breakage of the operating diaphragm,
membrana di lavoro, non si possa verificare una perdita di no gas leakage (over 30 dm3/h) is possible inside the
gas nell'ambiente superiore a 30 dm3/h (punto 3.3.2. delle room (in compliance with par. 3.3.2. EN88
Norme EN88). specifications).
INSTALLAZIONE INSTALLATION
Si consiglia di installare il regolatore con membrana Install the governor with the diaphragm positioned
orizzontale (su tubazione orizzontale). Rispettare horizontally (on horizontal pipes). Be careful to follow
scrupolosamente il senso del flusso del gas indicato dalla always the direction of gas flow indicated by the arrow on
freccia sul regolatore. the governor.
Il montaggio del regolatore sull'impianto deve essere Suitable tools must be used for the governor fitting on the
eseguito con opportuni attrezzi da inserire sui mozzi dei inlet and outlet hubs. Never effect leverage on the sleeve
fori di entrata e uscita. of the upper cover when fitting the governor.
E' assolutamente vietato montare il regolatore facendo For all models with the filter inside, the governor is best
leva sul cannotto del coperchio superiore. fitted at a comfortable height from the ground so as to
Per la serie con il filtro incorporato si consiglia di montare facilitate the filter cleaning (fit always a suitable gas filter
il regolatore ad una conveniente altezza dal pavimento, in upstream the governor).
modo da facilitare la pulizia del filtro raccoglitore di Make sure that the pipes are clean and aligned so the
impurit (montare sempre un filtro idoneo per gas a monte governor is not under stress.
del regolatore). Do not remove the perforated diaphragm breather cap (3)
Accertarsi che le tubazioni siano pulite ed allineate in and do not obstruct the hole, otherwise the governor will
modo che il regolatore non sia sollecitato da tensioni. not work. Install the governor so avoiding contact with
Non togliere il tappo forato (3) per lo sfiato della membrana plastered walls.
e non ostruire il foro in quanto il regolatore non potrebbe Make sure that the governor is suitable to the intended use.
funzionare. Installare il regolatore in modo da non toccare
pareti intonacate. Verificare che il regolatore sia adatto
all'uso destinato.
MODELLI FILETTATI Rp 1/2 2" CON FILTRO INCORPORATO

Rp 1/2 2" THREADED MODELS WITH INCORPORATED FILTER
1 - Tappo superiore - Upper cap.

2 - Vite di regolazione pressione - Set-screw.
3 - Tappo di sfiato - Drain plug.
4 - Valvolino di sfiato - Bleed screw.
5 - Membrana di sicurezza - Safety diaphragm.
6 - Membrana di compensazione - Compensation diaphragm.
7 - Filtro - Filter.
8 - Guarnizione coperchio - Cover gasket.
9 - Coperchio filtro - Filter cover.
10 - Gomma di tenuta - Sealing gasket.
11 - Tubino presa pressione - Pressure pipe.
12 - Membrana di lavoro - Operating diaphragm.
13 - Molla - Spring.
14 - Rondella spingimolla - Spring washer.
64-0068-FG1B 11-03-2010 17:58 Pagina 6

CAMPO DI TARATURA DELLE MOLLE: P2 mbar - SPRINGS SETTING RANGE: P2 mbar
*) Per la messa fuori servizio sostituire la molla con il distanziale idoneo.

To put out of service replace the spring with the suitable spacer.
NB: I campi delle molle possono essere soggetti a variazione The springs range can be object of modifications

DIAGRAMMA PORTATE / PERDITE DI CARICO CAPACITY / PRESSURE LOSS DIAGRAM WITH

CON REGOLATORE MESSO FUORI SERVIZIO THE GOVERNOR OUT OF SERVICE
Con il termine "regolatore messo fuori servizio" si The meaning of governor out of service is intended that
5 intende che escluso dal normale funzionamento; per the governor is out of the normal operation; to get this
fare ci viene inserito un distanziale rigido al posto status it is inserted one spacer to replace the spring and
della molla, in questo modo l'otturatore del regolatore so the governors shutter is kept completely open.
viene mantenuto completamente aperto. This diagram is used to know the min. pressure loss
Questo diagramma serve per conoscere la "perdita di (min. p) given by the governor to get one requested
carico" minima (p min.) che il regolatore deve disporre gas capacity; in practice, it is the pressure loss
per una determinata portata di gas; in pratica la (detected from the diagram) caused by the gas flow
perdita di pressione (rilevabile dal diagramma) dovuta through the body of the governor itself.
al passaggio del gas all'interno del corpo dello stesso The pressure drop means the arithmetic difference
regolatore. Per "caduta di pressione" si intende la between the (P1) inlet pressure and the (P2) pre-set
differenza aritmetica tra la pressione di entrata (P1) e la outlet pressure.
pressione di uscita (P2) a cui verr tarato il regolatore. The efficiency of the governors is even guaranteed at
I regolatori di pressione funzionano efficacemente low pressure drop, any way, to get good performances
anche con una bassa caduta di pressione, tuttavia per it is suggested to have a pressure drop double the
disporre di un certo margine per assicurare un buon pressure drop given by the diagram.
funzionamento, si dovrebbe poter disporre di una
caduta di pressione pari almeno al doppio della perdita
di carico risultante dal diagramma
DN50/40
DN15
DN20
DN25
DN32
DN40
DN50
50
40
30
Perdita di carico/Pressure loss p (mbar)
20
15
10
7
6
5
1
1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 70 100 150 200 300
2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 70 100 150 200
3 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 70 100 150 200
4 5 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 70 100 150 200 300
3
Portata/Capacity Q (m /h)
1 Metano / Natural gas dv: 0,62

2 Aria / Air dv: 1
3 G.P.L. / L.P.G. dv: 1,56
4 Gas citt / Town gas dv: 0,45
Le descrizioni e le fotografie contenute nel presente, si intendono fornite a semplice titolo informativo e non impegnativo.
Giuliani Anello si riserva il diritto di apportare, senza alcun preavviso, qualsiasi modifica tecnica ed estetica ai propri prodotti.
The descriptions and photographs contained in this product specification sheet are supplied by way of information only and are not binding.
Giuliani Anello reserves the right to carry out any technical and design improvements to its products without prior notice.
Re-order no. 64-0068-I-UK-IT/3-03-10-Rev.0
Giuliani Anello S.r.l.

Via F.lli Bandiera, 8 - 44042 Cento (FE) - Italy
Phone +39 051.901.124 - Fax +39 051.901.405
e-mail: giulianianello@giulianianello.it - www.giulianianello.com
Series 90
Modutrol IV Motors
PRODUCT DATA
FEATURES
Replaces M934A,D, M941, M944A,C,D, M945A,D,F,
M954, M965, and M975 motors.
Integral junction box provides NEMA 3 weather
protection.
Integral spring return returns motor to normal position
when power is interrupted.
Motor and circuitry operate from 24 Vac. Models
available with factory installed transformer, or a field
added internal transformer.
Quick-connect terminals are standardscrew terminal
adapter is available.
Adapter bracket for matching shaft height of older
motors is available.
Motors have field adjustable stroke (90 to 160).
Die-cast aluminum housing.
Integral auxiliary switches are available factory
mounted, or can be field added.
APPLICATION Nominal timing standard of 30 seconds (90 stroke),
and 60 seconds (160 stroke). Other timings available.
The Series 90 Modutrol IV Motors are spring return and Spring return motors can operate valve linkages form
non-spring return modulating proportional control motors. Use power end or auxiliary end shafts for normally closed
these motors with controllers that provide a Series 90 output or normally open valve applications.
to operate dampers or valves. All models have dual shafts (slotted and tapped on
both ends).
All models have auxiliary switch cams.
Fixed torque throughout the entire voltage range.
Motors are designed for either normally open or
normally closed valves and dampers.
Field addable interface modules can be mounted in the
junction box to upgrade the motor to Series 70
(electronic) control.
Contents
Application ........................................................................ 1
Features ........................................................................... 1
Specifications ................................................................... 2
Ordering Information ........................................................ 2
Wiring ............................................................................... 7
Settings and Adjustments ................................................. 10
Operation .......................................................................... 11
Checkout .......................................................................... 13
Replacement .................................................................... 13
Based on 63-263107
SERIES 90 MODUTROL IV MOTORS
SPECIFICATIONS NOTE: Auxiliary switches can only be added to motors

that include auxiliary switch cams. (These cams
cannot be field-added.)
TRADELINE Models: Selected and packaged to provide
ease of stocking, ease of handling and maximum replace- Modutrol IV Order Number Guide: See Table 1.
ment value. Specifications are the same as those of stan-
dard models unless specified otherwise.
Table 1. Modutrol IV Series 2 and 3 Model Number Guide.
M Motor
91 Proportioning Series 90 Control
94 Flame Safeguard Firing Rate Motor
7 60 lb-in. Spring Return 75 lb-in. Non-Spring Return
8 150 lb-in. Non-Spring Return
9 300 lb-in. Non-Spring Return
4 Dual-ended shaft Non-Spring Return
5 Normally Closed (NC) Spring Return
F 2 Auxiliary Switches Adjustable Stroke Normally Closed
M 91 8 4 F XXXX See HIC Catalog for Complete O.S. Number
NOTE: Torque designation corresponds to torque rating at standard timing (nominally 60 sec for 160 and 30 sec for 90 except
for 300 lb-in. motors which have timings of 2 or 4 min).
Dimensions: Refer to Fig. 2. Electrical Minimum: -40 F (-40 C).

Ratings: Refer to Table 2. Control NOTE: 25% duty cycle indicates that the motor operates
for 6 out of every 24 hours.
Inputs: Proportional, Series 90.
Dead Weight Load On Shaft:
NOTE: Motor Series 90 control can be either Electronic, Power or Auxiliary End: 200 lb (90.8 kg) maximum.
or Mechanical (135 ohm). Maximum Combined Load: 300 lb (136 kg). (Dual shaft
motors only.)
Auxiliary Switch Ratings: Refer to Table 3.
Crankshaft: 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) square. (All models built after
Ambient Temperature Ratings: 2006 have dual end shaft.)
Maximum: 150 F (66 C) at 25% duty cycle.
ORDERING INFORMATION
When purchasing replacement and modernization products from your TRADELINE wholesaler or distributor, refer to the
TRADELINE Catalog or price sheets for complete ordering number. If you have additional questions, need further information,
or would like to comment on our products or services, please write or phone:
1. Your local Honeywell Environmental and Combustion Controls Sales Office (check white pages of your phone directory).
2. Honeywell Customer Care
1985 Douglas Drive North
Minneapolis, Minnesota 55422-4386
3. Honeywell Industrial Combustion
Luchthavenlaan 16
1800 Vilvoorde
Belgium
Based on 63-263107 2
ASYMMETRICAL MOTORS SYMMETRICAL MOTORS

VERTICAL VERTICAL VERTICAL VERTICAL
REFERENCE REFERENCE REFERENCE REFERENCE
FULLY CLOSED FULLY CLOSED FULLY CLOSED
10 10 10
45
90 FULLY
CLOSED
160 160
90
FULLY OPEN
FULLY
OPEN
FULLY OPEN FULLY OPEN

90 DEGREE STROKE 160 DEGREE STROKE 90 DEGREE STROKE 160 DEGREE STROKE
SPRING RETURN MOTORS AND NON-SPRING RETURN MOTORS NON-SPRING RETURN MOTORS
M31079
Fig. 1. Stroke.
TOP VIEW TOP VIEW OF BRACKET
4-7/8 4-1/4
(124) (107)
4-5/8
(116) 5-13/16
(148)
5-1/2
(140) 2-5/16
(58)
11/16
(17)
13/16 POWER END

1/4 (20)
(7) 1/4 (7)
13/16
2 (20) 4-7/8 (124)
4-1/16 (103) 1-1/2 (37) 5-9/16 (141)
3
5-1/2 (140)
1-1/2 (37)
JUNCTION
BOX
3/4
(19)
MOTOR
6-7/16
(164)
SPRING RETURN MODEL SHOWN
AUXILIARY POWER 5-3/8
END END (137) 1 FOR 60 LB-IN. SPRING RETURN MODELS 8-3/4 (222).
FOR NON-SPRING RETURN MODELS 7-5/16 (185).
2-9/16
(66) 2 FOR 60 LB-IN. SPRING RETURN MODELS (SHOWN).
3 FOR NON-SPRING RETURN MODELS.
9/16 (15)
1
ADAPTER 3/4
(19) M18998D
BRACKET
Fig. 2. Modutrol IV Motor mounting dimensions in inches (mm).
Stroke: Models available with field adjustable stroke from 90 to 160 (See Settings and Adjustments figure 11).
3 Based on 63-263107
Table 2. Power Consumption Ratings. Table 3. Auxiliary Switch Ratings (in Amps).
Power Consumption
Single Contact Ratinga 120 V 240 V
Family VA Rating
Full Load 7.2 3.6
M9174F 12
Locked Rotor 43.2 21.6
M9184F 15 a 40 VA pilot duty, 120/240 Vac on opposite contact.
M9185F 20
M9484F 15 Timing And Torque: Refer to Table 5.
M9494F 20 Approvals:
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Listed: File No. E4436, Guide
No. XAPX to US and Canadian standards.
U.S. Patents: pending
Table 4. Primary 50017460-001 Color Code
Lead Color Primary Voltage

Brown 24 VAC
White 120 VAC
Blue 230 VAC
Black Common
All Transformers have brown secondary (24 VAC) wires.
Table 5. Series 90 Modutrol Motor Timing and Torque Ratings.
Rated Torque in lb-in. (Nm)b
Nominal Timinga in sec Normal Running Torque Breakaway Torquec
90 160 Spring Return Non-Spring Return Spring Return Non-Spring Return
30 60 35 (4) 70 (8)
15d/30 30d/60 60 (6.8) 75 (8.5) 120 (13.6) 150 (17)
30 60 150 (17) 300 (34)
60 120 300 (34) 600 (68)
a Timings apply to all TRADELINE models. Some OEM models are available with non-standard timing/torque.
b The torque rating for dual-ended shaft motors is the sum of the shaft torques (power-end torque plus auxiliary-end torque).
c Breakaway torque is maximum torque available to overcome occasional large loads such as a seized damper or valve.
d Low timing is for M9184D1005 only.
NOTE: Some 150 lb-in. and 300 lb-in. torque adjustable stroke motors have timings that are twice that of the nominal timing.
IMPORTANT
Never use a Modutrol Motor continuously at the 4074EAU W973 Resister Kit provides for control of two or three
Breakaway Torque rating. Series 90 Motors from a W973 Single-zone Logic Panel or
W7100 Discharge Air Controller.
Accessories: 4074EDC 4-20 mA Resistor Kit drives one Series 90 Motor
220736B Internal dual Auxiliary Switch Kit can be field- from a 4-20 mA controller.
installed. 4074EED Unison Control 4-20 mA Resistor Kit provides for
220738A Adapter Bracket raises motor shaft height by 19 mm control of up to four Series 90 Motors from one 4-20 mA
to match that of previous Modutrol Motor models. controller.
220741A Screw Terminal Adapter converts the standard 4074ERU Weatherproofing Kit provides NEMA 3 rating for
quick-connect terminals to screw terminals. Modutrol IV Motors mounted in position other than upright.
221455A Infinitely Adjustable Crank Arm approximately 0.75 50017460-001 Internal Transformer; 24/120/230 Vac 50/60 Hz
inch shorter than the 4074ELY Crank Arm, can rotate primary, 24 Vac secondary, quick connect terminals.
through downward position and clear base of motor without 50017460-003 Internal Transformer; 120 Vac 50/60 Hz pri-
requiring use of adapter bracket. mary, 24 Vac secondary, quick connect terminals.
221508A Resistor Board plugs onto Series 90 Motor quick- 7617ADW Crank Arm approximately 0.75 inch shorter than
connect wire terminals. Provides same functionality as 7616BR Crank Arm. Can rotate through downward position
4074BYK, 4074EAU, 4074EDC, or 4074EED Resistor Kits. and clear base of motor without requiring use of adapter
4074BYK Series 90 Resistor Kit provides for unison control of bracket.
up to six Series 90 Motors. Q100 Linkage connects Modutrol Motor to V51 Butterfly Valve.
Requires the 220738A adapter bracket (packed with
TRADELINE Modutrol IV Motors).
Based on 63-263107 4
Q181 Auxiliary Potentiometer for sequence or unison control of

1 to 4 additional modulating (Series 90) motors.
INSTALLATION
Q209E,F Potentiometer limits motor minimum position.
Q5001 Bracket and Linkage Assembly connects Modutrol When Installing this Product...
Motor to a water or steam globe valve.
Q605 Damper Linkage connects motor to damper. Includes 1. Read these instructions carefully. Failure to follow them
motor crank arm. could damage the product or cause a hazardous condi-
Q607 External Auxiliary Switch controls auxiliary equipment as tion.
a function of motor position. 2. Check the ratings given in the instructions and on the
Q7130A Interface Module with selectable voltage ranges product to make sure the product is suitable for your
(4-7 Vdc, 6-9 Vdc, and 10.5-13.5 Vdc) adapts motor to application.
M71XX function. 3. Installer must be a trained, experienced service techni-
Q7230A Interface Module with selectable control (2-10 Vdc or cian.
4-20 mA) and adjustable zero and span adapts motor to 4. After installation is complete, check out product opera-
M72XX function. tion as provided in these instructions.
Q7330A Interface Module for W936 Economizer applications
adapts motor to M73XX function.
CAUTION
Electrical Shock or Equipment Damage Hazard.
Can shock individuals or short equipment circuitry.
Table 6. Modutrol Motor Cross-Reference. Disconnect all power supplies before installation.
Original Motor Replacements Motors with auxiliary switches can have more than one
disconnect.
M941, M944A,C,D, M9184F, M9194F, M9484F, M9494F
M954
M934D
M945A,D,F, M955
M9174F
M9185F
CAUTION
Equipment Damage Hazard.
Can damage the motor beyond repair.
Never turn the motor shaft by hand or with a wrench.
Forcibly turning the motor shaft damages the gear train
and stroke limit contacts.
IMPORTANT
Always conduct a thorough checkout when
installation is complete.
Location
Allow enough clearance for installing accessories and motor
servicing when selecting a location (See Fig. 2). If located
outdoors, use liquid-tight conduit connectors with the junction
box to provide NEMA 3 weather protection. If mounted
outdoors in a position other than upright, install a 4074ERU
Weatherproofing Kit and liquid-tight connectors to provide
NEMA 3 protection.
CAUTION
Motor Damage Hazard.
Deteriorating vapors and acid fumes can damage
metal parts.
Install motor in areas free of acid fumes and other
deteriorating vapors.
In excessive salt environments, mounting base and screws

should be zinc or cadmium plated, not stainless steel or brass.
Use the 220738A Adapter Bracket for mounting on these
surfaces.
5 Based on 63-263107
Mounting To mount the motor with the bracket (See Fig. 3):
1. Mount the bracket to the equipment with existing or stan-
dard bolts.
2. Using the provided bolts, mount the motor to the bracket
CAUTION
threaded holes.
Can damage the motor beyond repair. For valve linkage applications (other than the Q5001):
Always install motors with the crankshaft horizontal. 1. Mount the bracket to the linkage.
Improper motor mounting can result in inadequate 2. Position the motor on the bracket to align the motor shaft
motor gear train lubrication. with the linkage.
3. Attach the motor to the bracket with the four bolts pro-
Use the following guidelines for proper motor mounting: vided (See Fig. 4).
Always install motors with the crankshaft horizontal.
Mounting flanges extending from motor housing base are
drilled for 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) machine screws or bolts. Damper Linkages
Non-Spring Return Motors are shipped from the factory in The motor does not include a crank arm. Order the crank arm,
the closed position (at the limit of counterclockwise rotation, included in the Q605 Linkage, separately (refer to Accessories
as viewed from the power end of the motor). in the Specifications section). For detailed instructions on the
Spring Return Motors are shipped from the factory in their assembly of specific linkages, refer to the instruction sheet
normal position: packed with the linkage.
Normally closed models: shipped at limit of counter-
clockwise rotation, as viewed from the power end of the
motor.
CAUTION
Adapter Bracket Stalling a motor can damage the drive shaft.
Ensure installation of motors and linkages allows the
The 220738A Adapter Bracket, positioned between the motor motor to drive through full stroke without obstruction.
and the equipment, raises motor shaft height by 0.75 in.
(19 mm) to match that of the former Modutrol Motor.
Valve Linkages
The following applications require this bracket:
Q607 External Auxiliary Switch. The Q100 Linkage requires the 220738A Adapter Bracket for all
Damper linkage applications require added clearance to valve applications. Applications with the Q5001 Valve Linkage
allow: do not require the 220738A Adapter Bracket (Refer to Fig. 3).
crank arm rotation through the downward
position. Junction Box
sufficient damper linkage to reach the motor shaft.
All valve linkages except the Q5001. When used with liquid-tight conduit connectors, the junction
box provides NEMA 3 weather protection for the motor. The
junction box, standard with replacement motors, encloses the
terminals and provides knockouts for wiring conduits. Housing
an internal transformer or internal auxiliary switches requires
use of the junction box.
Based on 63-263107 6
STANDARD
BOLTS (4)
BOLTS
1 PROVIDED (4)
WIRING
BOX
MOTOR
ADAPTER
BRACKET
EQUIPMENT
BASE
1 #12 OR 1/4" ZINC PLATED

MACHINE SCREWS OR BOLTS M18999
NON-SPRING RETURN SPRING RETURN

NOTE: When no bracket is used in replacement applications, damper linkages require adjustment for the new shaft posi-
tion.
Fig. 3. Mounting the Motor with an Adapter Bracket.
WIRING
JUNCTION
BOX
CAUTION
Electrical Shock or Equipment Damage Hazard.
POWER
MOTOR
END OF Can shock individuals or short equipment
MOTOR
circuitry.
Q5001
Disconnect power supply before installation.
VALVE
LINKAGE IMPORTANT
All wiring must agree with applicable codes, ordi-
nances and regulations.
1. Ensure that the voltage and frequency stamped on the
motor correspond to the power supply characteristics.
1/4-20 UNC 2. When connecting several motors in parallel, ensure that
1 in. LONG the power supply VA rating is large enough to provide
MOUNTING
BOLTS power to all motors used without overloading.
VALVE
3. Fig. 11 shows that the motor terminals are
quick-connects located on top of the printed circuit
board.
4. To access the wiring compartment:
a. Remove the four screws from the junction box top.
M18994
b. Lift off the cover.
5. Refer to Fig. 5 for typical wiring, and Fig. 7 for internal
auxiliary switch connections.
Fig. 4. Mounting the Motor on a Q5001 Valve Linkage.
NOTE: Reverse motor rotation by switching wires at
either the motor or the panel. Reverse rotation on
the Series 90 models by reversing the wires at ter-
minals W and B.
7 Based on 63-263107
SERIES 90
CONTROLLER MOTOR
2 YELLOW LEAD 2 3
BLUE LEAD
R R
T1 1
W W
T2
B B
1
L1 TRANSFORMER RED LEAD 2

1 (HOT)
1 USE NEC CLASS 1 WIRING UNLESS POWER SUPPLY
L2 MEETS CLASS 2 REQUIREMENTS. TAPE UNUSED LEADS.
ENSURE THE CURRENT DRAW OF THE EXTERNAL CIRCUIT
IS LESS THAN SWITCH CONTACT RATING.
1 POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND
OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. 2 ON TWO-SWITCH MOTORS, SECOND SWITCH HAS BLACK
LEADS WITH BLUE, YELLOW, AND RED TRACERS.
2 TRANSFORMER MAY BE INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL M770A
3 SOME AUXILIARY SWITCH ASSEMBLIES INCLUDE ONLY
RED AND YELLOW LEADS. SOME OTHERS DO NOT INCLUDE
THE YELLOW LEAD. M17099
Fig. 5. Typical Series 90 Wiring.
Fig. 7. Auxiliary Switch Schematic.
135 OHM
POTENTIOMETER MOTOR
W W SERIES 90 SLAVE MOTOR CONNECTION FROM 4-20MA

T1 24 VOLT 4-20 4-20+ 24 VOLT
R R
T2
B B
SET DIP T1 T2 R(-) B W1 W1 W(+)

SWITCH
L1 TRANSFORMER
TO TWO
1 (HOT) MOTORS 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
T1 T2 R B W
L2
INTERFACE
MODULE
1 POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND 221508A2
OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
M27085A
2 TRANSFORMER MAY BE INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL M13708
Fig. 6. Wiring for Potentiometer Control Fig. 8. Series 90 Slave Motor Connection.
For controlling up to six Series 90s in parallel with a 135 ohm

SERIES 60
pot or slide wire type series 90 controller, add the appropriate CONTROLLER
resistor indicated in the table below to ONE of the Series 90
motors, from terminal B to terminal W. As an alternative, one R
M6284
221508A2 module can be used to provide any of the resistor
values given below: B W R
Table 7. Resistor Values of Motors in Parallel 1 3
Number of Motors in T 4
Parallel Resistor Value G
1 None Y
R (HOT)
2 140 Ohms
C M9184
3 72 Ohms
4 47 Ohms R (HOT) W
T1
5 36 Ohms C
R
T2
6 29 Ohms B
M27035
Fig. 9. Series 60 Controller.
Based on 63-263107 8
The motors in the application need to be all symmetrical or all

asymmetrical. The M62 motor needs to be a "-S" slaving
model. In order to get the correct response the Series 62
needs the appropriate shunt resistor from Table
8. The motors' potentiometer settings are given in the
configuration table (Table 9) below. When slaving more than
one Series 90 motor use the appropriate resistor table as
indicated by the configuration table and install two resistors to
ONE of the motors (Tables 10 and 11). If the motor is the M62
master connect one resistor from terminals T to G and one
from T to Y. If the motor is one of the M90 slaves connect one
resistor from terminals R to B and one from R to W.
NOTE: More than 6 slaves is not recommended.
Table 8. Series 60 and Series 90 in Slaving Application
Feedback Sensitivity Internal Linear Series 90 Slaving

OS Number Resistance Adjustment Shunted Feedback Shunt Resistor
M6274F1009-F, M6284F1078-F, M6285F1001-F, 10 K Ohms No No Yes Not Available
M6294F1009-F, M6294F1017-F
-S Slaving Series 90 Mod IV Motor Not applicable for Europe

-F 0-10K Feedback
Table 9. Configuration Table
Symmetrical or Master Slave Master Master Slave Slave Resistor

Asymmetrical Stroke Stroke Stroke Pot Sensitivity Pot Stroke Pot Sensitivity Pot Table
Symmetrical 160 160 CW CW CW CW 1
Symmetrical 90 90 CCW CCW CCW CCW 2
Symmetrical 160 90 CCW CW CCW CCW 1
Symmetrical 90 160 Configuration not recommended
Asymmetrical 160 160 CW CW CW CW 1
Asymmetrical 90 90 CCW CW CW CW 1
Asymmetrical 160 90 Configuration not recommended
Asymmetrical 90 160 Configuration not recommended
Table 10. Resistor Table 1 Table 11. Resistor Table 2

Number of Motors in Parallel Resistor Value Number of Motors in Parallel Resistor Value
1 NONE 1 NONE
2 3500 Ohms 2 5000 Ohms
3 2000 Ohms 3 2400 Ohms
4 1300 Ohms 4 1700 Ohms
5 1000 Ohms 5 1400 Ohms
6 800 Ohms 6 1200 Ohms
9 Based on 63-263107
SETTINGS AND ADJUSTMENTS

CAUTION
Careless Installation Hazard.
Before Setting Stroke Use of excessive force while adjusting cams
damages the motor.
1. Remove the top cover from the motor. To avoid damaging motor end switches, set cams by
2. Disconnect the controller from the motor. moving only the top of the screwdriver.
3. Connect a remote potentiometer to the motor as shown
in Fig. 6 (R-W-B).
The stroke adjustment on the series 2 and series 3 motors is

CAUTION
Careless Installation Hazard.
made using the stroke and sensitivity potentiometers located Forcibly turning the motor shaft damages the gear
under the cove inside the motor. The stroke adjustment on a train and stroke limit contacts.
series 1 motor was made by adjusting the CAMS. Never turn motor shaft manually (either by hand or with
a wrench).
For Series 2 and Series 3 Motors:
To set the stroke to 160 degrees (maximum position) turn both
stroke and sensitivity potentiometers fully clockwise , CAUTION
using a 1/8 inch straight-blade screwdriver.
Can damage the motor beyond repair.
To set the stroke to 90 degrees (minimum position) turn both Set cams by moving the top of the screwdriver only.
stroke and sensitivity potentiometers fully counter-clockwise Pressing screwdriver against cam slot sides or use of
, using a 1/8 inch straight-blade screwdriver. excessive force can damage motor end switches.
To set the stroke between 90 and 160 degrees:

1. Turn the stroke and sensitivity potentiometers fully
clockwise, using a 1/8 inch straight-blade screwdriver.
2. Turn the remote potentiometer (previously installed on
R-W-B terminals) to maximum position. W INNER AUXILIARY
SWITCH
3. Turn the sensitivity potentiometer to the selected stroke
(between 90 and 160 degrees) OR until the motor stops.
4. IF the motor stops before the selected stroke is reached, INNER AUXILIARY
B SWITCH CAM (BLUE)
turn the stroke potentiometer until the selected stroke is
reached OR
POWER
5. IF the selected stroke is reached using the sensitivity END
potentiometer, turn the stroke potentiometer counter-
clockwise until the motor begins to move. Then R
turn the stroke potentiometer clockwise slightly to OUTER AUXILIARY
T2 SWITCH CAM (RED)
have the position correspond to the sensitivity
potentiometer.
6. Make sure the minimum position is correct. T1
OUTER AUXILIARY
SWITCH
ADJUSTABLE STROKE POTENTIOMETER

NOTE: NOT ALL FEATURES AVAILABLE ON ALL MODELS. M31108A
STROKE
POTENTIOMETER SENSITIVITY
POTENTIOMETER Fig. 11. Terminals and Adjustments.
TIMING POTENTIOMETER
Auxiliary Switches
(M9182D1023 ONLY) Adjustable cams actuate the auxiliary switches. These cams
AUXILIARY
can be set to actuate the switches at any angle within the
SWITCH CAMS stroke of the motor. Select switch differential of 1 or 10.
POWER END
OF MOTOR M27388A
Motors with factory-added auxiliary switches are shipped in the
closed position (fully counterclockwise, as viewed from the
Fig. 10. Potentiometer Location and Stroke Adjustment power end). Auxiliary cam default actuates the switches 30
Setup for Non-Spring Return Series 90 Motors. from full open with a 1 differential. With the motor in the closed
(fully counterclockwise) position, the auxiliary switch breaks
contacts R-B. Refer to Fig. 7 (or the auxiliary switch Instruction
Sheet) for auxiliary switch wiring.
.
NOTE: Auxiliary switches can only be added to motors
that include auxiliary switch cams. (These cams
cannot be field-added.)
Based on 63-263107 10
NOTE: Series 3 Motors are shipped with auxiliary switch

cams that permit acceptance of 220736A,B Inter-
OPERATION
nal Auxiliary Switch Kits. Refer to 220736A,B
Installation Instructions. Use Series 90 Modutrol IV Motors for standard Series 90
operation (See Table 12):
1. Two potentiometers, one in the controller and one in the
Auxiliary Switch Adjustment motor, along with the motor resistor network, form a
1. Remove the top cover from the motor to gain access to bridge circuit. As long as the value of the controlled
the motor terminals and auxiliary cams. medium remains at the setpoint, the circuit remains bal-
2. Disconnect the controller from the motor. anced and the motor does not run.
3. Connect a potentiometer to the motor as shown in Fig. 6. 2. When the controlled medium value changes, the control-
4. Using the potentiometer, drive the motor to the position ler potentiometer wiper moves, unbalancing the bridge
where the auxiliary equipment is to be switched. circuit.
5. For a 1 switch differential, check continuity of the auxil- 3. The imbalance is amplified and the microcontroller then
iary switch contacts R-B and rotate the cam as follows: drives the motor in the direction necessary to correct the
a. If the contacts are open, rotate the cam clockwise controlled medium change.
until the R-B contacts close. 4. As the motor shaft rotates, it turns the feedback potenti-
b. If the contacts are closed, rotate the cam counter- ometer, rebalancing the bridge circuit, stopping the
clockwise until the R-B contacts open. motor.
6. For a 10 switch differential:
a. Spring return models: rotate the cam approximately Table 12. Modutrol IV Motor Operation.
180 so that the slow-rise portion of the cam actu- Motor Type Signal Resulting Action
ates the switch. Then check continuity of the auxiliary
switch contacts R-B. Non-Spring Return Open W and short drives open
b. Non-spring return models: check continuity of the or Spring Return R to B
auxiliary switch contacts R-B. Open B and short drives closed
7. Rotate the cam as follows: R to W
a. If the contacts are open, rotate the cam counter- Jumper R-W-B drives to midstroke
clockwise until the R-B contacts close.
b. If the contacts are closed, rotate the cam clockwise None drives closed
until the R-B contacts open. Non-Spring Return Power Loss stops (none)
8. Check for proper auxiliary equipment differential and
switching by driving the motor though the full stroke in Spring Return Power Loss spring returns
both directions. (closed)
9. Disconnect the potentiometer, reconnect the controller,
and replace the motor top cover.
NOTE: Changing the differential from 1 to 10 reverses
the switching action. For example, with a 10 dif-
ferential, switch contacts R-B make and R-W
break on a counterclockwise (closed) rotation.
With a 1 differential, switch contacts R-W make
and R-B break on a counterclockwise (closed)
rotation.
M17626
Fig. 12. Attaching a Shunt Resistor to TRADELINE Motors.
Table 13. Cam Arrangements.

Inner Outer
Motor Cam Cam
All M9XXXF Blue Red
11 Based on 63-263107
2 2
1/8 INCH
1/8 INCH RIGHT/INNER STRAIGHT-BLADE RIGHT/INNER
STRAIGHT-BLADE AUXILIARY SCREWDRIVER AUXILIARY
SCREWDRIVER SWITCH SWITCH
SLOW RISE
PORTION SLOW RISE
(APPROX. INNER PORTION INNER
10 DIFF.) AUXILIARY (APPROX. AUXILIARY
CAM FAST RISE PORTION 10 DIFF.) FAST RISEPORTION
CAM (APPROX. 1 DIFF.)
(RED) (APPROX. 1 DIFF.)
(RED)
LEFT/OUTER LEFT/OUTER
AUXILIARY AUXILIARY
SWITCH SWITCH
SLOW RISE SLOW RISE

PORTION PORTION
(APPROX. (APPROX.
10 DIFF.) OUTER 10 DIFF.)
OUTER AUXILIARY
FAST RISE AUXILIARY CAM
PORTION CAM (BLUE)
(APPROX. 1 DIFF.) (RED)
FAST RISE
PORTION
(APPROX.
1 DIFF.)
MOTOR MOTOR
MOTOR MOTOR OPEN CLOSE
OPEN CLOSE POWER
POWER END
END
INNER AUXILIARY
CAM 1
2 1/8 INCH 2
RIGHT/INNER STRAIGHT-BLADE
AUXILIARY SCREWDRIVER
1/8 INCH RIGHT/INNER
STRAIGHT-BLADE SWITCH
AUXILIARY
SCREWDRIVER SWITCH
RIGHT/INNER
SLOW RISE AUXILIARY
PORTION SWITCH
(APPROX.
10 DIFF.)
SLOW RISE INNER
PORTION AUXILIARY
(APPROX. INNER FAST RISE CAM
10 DIFF.) AUXILIARY PORTION (BLUE)
CAM (APPROX.
(BLUE) 1 DIFF.)
LEFT/OUTER
AUXILIARY OUTER AUXILIARY FAST RISE
SWITCH POWER CAM LEFT/OUTER PORTION
1 (APPROX.
LEFT/OUTER END OF AUXILIARY
AUXILIARY MOTOR SWITCH 1 DIFF.)
SWITCH
SLOW RISE SLOW RISE

PORTION PORTION
FAST RISE (APPROX. 1 CAM ARRANGEMENT VARIES WITH MODEL. OUTER (APPROX.
OUTER FAST RISE 10 DIFF.)
PORTION AUXILIARY 10 DIFF.) AUXILIARY
(APPROX. CAM PORTION
2 MOVE SCREWDRIVER AT TOP ONLY TO CAM
1 DIFF.) (BLUE) (APPROX.
(RED)
ADJUST CAM. 1 DIFF.)
MOTOR MOTOR NOTE: CAMS ARE OFFSET VERTICALLY TO MOTOR

CLOSE MOTOR
OPEN POWER PROVIDE BETTER VIEW OF INNER CAM. OPEN CLOSE
POWER
END
END M17672
Fig. 13. Auxiliary Switch Adjustment.
Based on 63-263107 12
CHECKOUT REPLACEMENT
After the installation and linkage adjustment, check the entire
motor and control hookup. Proper checkout ensures that: Damper Application
The motor operates the load (damper or valve) properly. 1. Turn off power and remove wiring from the old motor.
The motor responds properly to the controller as the input 2. Remove the crank arm from shaft of old motor and
varies (See Table 12). remove the old motor.
The auxiliary switch, if used, operates at the desired point of 3. Determine necessity of the mounting bracket. If the link-
motor rotation. age can reach the new motor shaft position and the
1. Inspect motor, linkage, and valve or damper to ensure all crank arm has clearance for the necessary rotation, the
mechanical connections are correct and secure. bracket is not required. Use the 220738A Adapter
Bracket or the 221455A Crank Arm if the crank arm must
NOTE: In damper installations, the pushrod should not
rotate through the bottom plane of the motor.
extend more than a few inches past the ball
a. If no bracket is required, mount the new motor
joints.
directly to the equipment and refer to the Installation,
2. Ensure that there is adequate clearance for the linkage Settings and Adjustments, and the Operation and
throughout the entire motor stroke without binding or Checkout sections of these instructions.
striking other objects. b. If the bracket is required, refer to the Adapter Bracket
3. Ensure the motor transformer is properly sized. section and Fig. 3 in addition to the Installation, Set-
tings and Adjustments, and the Operation and
NOTE: If a common transformer is used to power multi- Checkout sections of these instructions.
ple motors, ensure the power input is in phase 4. Use No. 12 or 1/4 inch machine screws or bolts to mount
with all motors. the new motor.
5. Mount damper crank arm and linkage to the new motor
4. Drive the motor fully open and fully closed shaft.
(See Table 12). 6. Use the Checkout procedures to test the crank arm and
linkage adjustment.
NOTE: Refer to controller or system instructions for
additional checkout procedures.
Valve Application
5. For spring return motors, ensure that the valve or
damper returns to normal position upon power interrup- When replacing a motor in a valve application, the linkage
tion. determines the necessity of the 220738A Adapter Bracket.
6. Return the controller to the desired setting before leaving With Q100, Q601 or Q618 Linkages, it is necessary to use the
the job. 220738A to raise the motor shaft to the appropriate height.
Valve applications with a Q5001 Linkage do not require the
220738A Adapter Bracket. To operate Honeywell V5011
two-way or V5013 three-way valves through full stroke, use a
160 stroke motor or make sure the stroke is adjusted to 160
degrees.
13 Based on 63-263107
Based on 63-263107 14
15 63-263107
Automation and Control Solutions

Honeywell Industrial Combustion
Luchthavenlaan 16
1800 Vilvoorde U.S. Registered Trademark
Belgium 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Based on 63-263107 M.S. Rev. 11-12
hic.emea.honeywell.com Printed in Europe
7 631
ISO 9001
VGD20... VGD40...
Double Gas Valves VGD20...

VGD40...
Double gas valves for use on gas trains, consisting of 2 class A safety shutoff
valves.
Suited for use in connection with gases of the gas families I...III.
The double gas valve is to be combined with 2 actuators of the SKP line (e.g. to
provide the functions of 2 safety shutoff valves connected in series, with differ-
ent types of gas pressure governor if required).
For supplementary Data Sheets on the actuators, refer to Use.
The VGD20.../VGD40... and this Data Sheet are intended for use by OEMs which
integrate the double gas valves in their products.
Use
The double gas valves are used primarily on gas trains for burners.
In combination with the SKP actuators, the gas valve also serves as a:
- Shutoff valve (in connection with the SKP10...)
- Control valve with shutoff function (in connection with the SKP20..., SKP27...,
SKP50... or SKP70...)
For description and function of the SKP... actuators, refer to the following Data Sheets:
SKP10.../SKP20... Data Sheet 7641
SKP11... Data Sheet 7639
The double gas valves are designed for use with gases of the gas families I...III and
with air. Double gas valves in combination with SKP... actuators open slowly and close
rapidly. All types of VGD... can be randomly combined with the SKP...
CC1N7631en
Warning notes

warning notes should be observed!
Do not open, interfere with or modify the double gas valve, except when fitting the
service replacement set!
When used in connection with gas, the valves constitute part of the entire safety
system
Fall or shock can adversely affect the safety functions. Such valves may not be put
into operation, even if they do not exhibit any damage.
Engineering notes
Profile
Only VGD20... 1 Legend
2
1 Stem
3
2 Profile
7631z29/0402 3 Valve disk
VGD20... / VGD40... Protect the actuator against excessive temperatures (caused by radiation, for example),
to ensure the maximum permissible ambient temperatures will not be exceeded.
Mounting notes
To mount the double gas valve VGD20..., 2 flanges type AGA41... / AGA51... are
required
To prevent cuttings from falling inside the valve, first mount the flanges to the pip-
ing and then clean the associated parts
Mounting position On the gas train, the valve can be mounted in any position, but the permissible
mounting positions of the associated actuator must be observed (refer to the rele-
vant Data Sheet)
Direction of flow The direction of gas flow must be in accordance with the arrow on the valve body
When used in combination with the SKP20..., SKP27..., SKP50... or SKP70...,

the minimum gas pressure switch must always be mounted upstream of the
double gas valve!
VGD20... The electrohydraulic SKP10... actuator, which is used for shutoff functions, must
always be mounted on the inlet side while the actuators with integrated governor
(SKP20..., SKP27..., SKP50... or SKP70...) must always be fitted on the outlet side
of the valve (with a contoured disk). When using a 2-stage SKP10.123... actuator in
connection with an actuator with governor, mount the SKP10.123... on V2. The
actuator with governor (e.g. SKP20...) is then to be mounted on V1
Tightness Check to ensure the bolts on the flanges are properly tightened
Check to ensure the connections with all components are tight
Mounting and replacement of the actuator can take place while the valve is under
pressure
Sealing materials are not required
VGD20... Ensure that the O-rings are fitted between the flanges and the valve body
2/12

VGD40... Ensure that the gaskets are fitted between the flanges
Function Stem retracts valve opens

Stem extends valve closes
Installation notes
Installation work must be carried out by qualified staff
Gas pressure If the available gas pressure exceeds the valves maximum permissible operating
pressure, the gas pressure must be reduced by a pressure regulator upstream of
the valve
Commissioning notes
Commissioning work must be carried out by qualified staff

If environmental conditions produce corrosion (e.g. sea climate), apply protective
coating
Check wiring carefully prior to commissioning
Standards
CE conformity in accordance with the directives of the European Union

- Directive for pressure equipment 97/23 EEC
- Directive for gas appliances 90/396 EEC
Service notes
Check the correct functioning and the internal and external tightness of the VGD...
each time a valve has been replaced
The valve may only be replaced by qualified staff
Disposal
3/12

Mechanical design
VGD20... The double gas valves VGD20... are of the normally closed type and have 2 disks, one
noncontoured disk on the inlet side and one contoured disk on the outlet side. The stems
are guided on both sides of the disks, thus ensuring precise alignment and tight shutoff.
The high closing force of the return spring is supported by the prevailing gas pressure
(class A to EN 161). A strainer on the inlet side protects the valve and downstream
controls against dirt. Valve body and connecting flanges are made of die-cast aluminium,
the seals of nitril rubber, and the stems of stainless steel. The double gas valves feature a
pilot gas connection Rp" (refer to Type summary and Dimensions). Gas valve,
flanges and actuators are supplied as separate items. The 4 screws required to fit the
SKP... to the valve are contained in the terminal compartment. No special tools are
required for assembly.
Connecting flanges The connecting flanges have a test point.

AGA41 / AGA51 for They are internally threaded and supplied as separate items, together with the neces-
VGD20... sary accessories, such as bolts, nuts, seals, etc.
The overall flange dimensions and bore-holes are identical, so that all types of flanges
can be fitted to the double gas valve, irrespective of nominal size.
This means that a 1" flange can be fitted to a 2" VGD... valve, and vice versa.
Each double gas valve requires 2 connecting flanges, which are to be ordered as sepa-
rate items.
Sectional view of the Operating principle

VGD20...
V1 V2
Connecting flange
Profiled valve disk
7631z03e/0501
Application example VGD20... with SKP10... and SKP70... (mounted on V2)
4/12

VGD40... The double gas valves VGD40... are double seat disk valves of the normally closed
type. The stems are guided on both sides of the disks, thus ensuring a precise stroke
and tight shutoff. To improve the control performance, the disks at the bottom are pro-
filed. The patented double seats are closed by 2 springs. The high closing force of the
return spring is supported by the prevailing gas pressure (class A to EN 161). The
spring of each stem exerts a pressure on the disk so that there is a defined closing
force acting on each disk. The surface area proportions of the 2 valve disks per stem
are such that the closing force increases as the inlet pressure increases (class A
valve to EN 161). A strainer on the inlet side protects the valve and downstream con-
trols against dirt. The 4 screws required to fit the SKP... to the valve are contained in
the terminal compartment. The double gas valves DN40150 correspond to the stan-
dard valve sizes of single valves (EN 558).
Sectional view of the Operating principle

VGD40...
V1 V2
7631z04/0401
The VGD40... are supplied with a pilot gas flange having a connection for the pilot
gas line and a connection for an impulse line.
This impulse line connection between the 2 valves and another impulse line connection
on the outlet flange can be connected directly to the constant pressure governor
SKP20... fitted to V1 or V2.
A universal mounting plate facilitates attachment of a number of commercially available
pressure switches or valves proving devices.
Both the pilot gas flange and the universal mounting plate are exchangeable and can
be fitted on either side of the valve.
Application example VGD40.080 with SKP10... and SKP20... (mounted on V2).
5/12

Type summary
Double gas valves DN Flow rate at Type reference

Dp = 10 mbar m / h air )
1 85 VGD20.403
2 100 VGD20.503
40 85 VGD40.040
50 100 VGD40.050
65 160 VGD40.065
80 250 VGD40.080
100 400 VGD40.100
125 580 (630 )) VGD40.125
150 700 (800 )) VGD40.150
) Flow rate to EN 161
2) Only for VGD40...: Flow rate of future SKP...line
Accessories
Flanges For use with VGD20... with test point Rp

(to be ordered as separate items)
Type DN 1) For double gas valve
AGA41 1 VGD20.403
AGA51 2 VGD20.503
1) Internally threaded to ISO R 7/1
Service replacement Consisting of:

sets Stems, disks, strainer and screws, washers and seals:
(for VGD20... only) For double gas valve Part number
VGD20.403 4 679 1550 0
VGD20.503 4 679 1550 0
Any opening of the valve, replacement of parts, or changes to the original design
is your responsibility and is undertaken at your own risk!
Ordering
Valve and actuator are supplied as separate items.
VGD20... only When ordering, please give type references of double gas valve and flanges.
Example:
Double gas valve 2 with 2 connecting flanges
1 VGD20.503
2 AGA51
The SKP... actuators are to be ordered as separate items.
VGD40... only When ordering, please give type reference of the double gas valve.
Example:
Double gas valve DN80
1 VGD40.080
The 2 lateral mounting plates for the pilot gas connection and a universal adapter plate
are included and ready fitted.
The SKP... actuators are to be ordered as separate items.
6/12

Technical data
General data Class A (EN 161)

Group 2 (EN 161)
Types of gases gas families I, II, III (to G260 of DVGW)
air
Built-in strainer, mesh size 0.9 mm
Flow rates refer to Flow chart
Perm. medium temperature -15...+60 C
Mounting spring housing horizontal or vertical, point-
ing downward
Flanges for VGD40... to ISO 7005; PN16
Materials
- VGD20... die-cast aluminium
- VGD40... sand-cast aluminium
Net weight
- VGD... refer to the table below
- AGA41 approx. 266 g
- AGA51 approx. 264 g
Operating pressure refer to Type summary
Max. permissible gas pressure:

Double gas Static pressure ( mbar) Dynamic Weight Volume
valve (with double gas valves (perm. operating (approx. kg) between
closed) pressure, mbar) V1 / V2
(liters)
VGD20.403 600 600 3.2 0.75
VGD20.503
VGD40.040 1000 7 0.8
VGD40.050 7.2
VGD40.065 8.4 1.3
VGD40.080 1200 9.6 1.5
VGD40.100 700 12.9 3
VGD40.125 18.2 5.2
VGD40.150 24.1 8.7
VGD40... In the burners standby mode, the VGD40 withstand pressures up to 1,500 mbar.
At a pressure of 1,500 mbar, the VGD40 remains safely closed or will safely close
when shutdown is initiated by an upstream pressure signal.
The proper functioning and outer tightness will not be affected.
Note:
Owing to the design of the VGD40, increasing inlet pressure causes the valve to
close (class A to EN 161).
Safety shutoff devices or venting devices that in addition to the high pressure con-
troller are normally used for protecting the gas valve on the burner are therefore no
longer required if the following conditions are met:
When, in the event the high pressure controller upstream of the valve fails, a pressure
of 1500 mbar at the inlet of the VGD40 is not exceeded and, in the event the permis-
sible operating pressure of the VGD40 is exceeded (DN65150: 700 mbar, and
DN4050: 1,000 mbar), a shutoff device (e.g. gas pressure switch) causes the
VGD40 to close.
7/12

Environmental Transport IEC 60 721-3-2
Operation IEC 60 721-3-3
Actuators The valves can be combined with the following types of actuators:
1) Closing time 1 s together with valve also for gas
Type reference Data Sheet Function

SKP10... 7641 ON / OFF )
SKP11... 7639 ON / OFF )
SKP20... 7641 ON / OFF with constant pressure control /
equal pressure control )
SKP27... / SQS27... 7644 ON / OFF with pressure control and setpoint read-
justment via an electrical signal )
SKP50... 7648 ON / OFF with ratio control,
signal input differential pressure )
SKP70... 7651 ON / OFF with ratio control,
signal input static pressure )
SQX31.../AGA60 4551 3-position modulating control cannot be used as
a safety shutoff valve
8/12

Flow chart of VGD
VGD40.125*
VGD40.150*
VGD40.040 / VGD20.403
VGD40.050 / VGD20.503
Limit VGD20.503
Limit VGD20.403
VGD40.125
VGD40.150
VGD40.080
VGD40.065
VGD40.080
VGD40.100
VGD40.125
VDG40.150
VGD40.040
VGD40.050
VGD40.065
VGD40.100
7631d06e/0801
3
m /h
1 Air
2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 200 400 800 1500 3000 5000 8000
m3/h
2 Natural gas
2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 200 400 800 1500 3000 5000 8000
300 600 1000 2000
3
m /h
3 Propane
1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 200 400 800 1500 3000 5000
300 600 1000 2000
m3/h
4 Town gas
2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 200 400 800 1500 3000 5000 8000
300 600 1000 2000
Legend:
* Characteristic available only in connection with the future SKP line
......... Minimum flow characteristics
____ Maximum flow characteristics (valve fully open)
Practical experience shows that applications in the range confined by the bold characteristics (max. 70 m/s) do not produce significant noise levels.
Note:
In the case of burners with small low-fire volumes, select a tightly sized valve (refer to SKP Data Sheets)
If the gas pressure exceeds the maximum permissible operating pressure, reduce it with a pressure controller upstream of the valve
The pressure drop (at maximum flow) is based on a fully open valve
Conversion of air volume to a corresponding gas volume (natural gas)
Basis of scale Abcissa Medium Density ratio Conversion factor

Volumetric flow QG in m / h dv to air 1
f =
dv
1 Air 1 1
2 Natural gas 0.61 1.28
3 Propane 1.562 0.8
4 Town gas 0.46 1.47
Conversion to air (m / h) from other types of gases:

QG
QL=
f
QL = amount of air m / h producing the same pressure drop as QG
9/12

Example: Recommended working range (extract of flow chart VGD)
VGD40.080
VGD40.080
PB
*
7631d07e/0801
PA
*
m3/h
1 Air
2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 200 400 800 1500 3000 5000 8000
300 600 1000 2000
m3/h
2 Natural gas
2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 200 400 800 1500 3000 5000 8000
300 600 1000 2000
m3/h
3 Propane
1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 200 400 800 1500 3000 5000
300 600 1000 2000
m3/h
4 Town gas
2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 200 400 800 1500 3000 5000 8000
300 600 1000 2000
Legend:
......... Minimum flow characteristics (can vary, depending on the quality of the pressure test points)
____ Maximum flow characteristics (valve fully open)
Points PA / PB, refer to Sizing examples below
PA / PB = working points
Function
VGD20... / VGD40...
Simplified sizing example VGD... with SKP70...
based on above chart:
Prerequisite Burners gas outlet towards the combustion chamber
Simplified example: constant combustion chamber = 0 mbar
pressure
Required control ratio RV = 4:1
Gas inlet pressure 20 mbar
1. High-fire
Burner pressure at nominal load 16 mbar
Volumetric flow at nominal load 200 m / h natural gas, corresponding to 156 m / h air
- DpVGD40.080 at nominal load 20-16 = 4 mbar
Point PA in the highlighted area
Point PA must be on or to the left of the maximum flow characteristic
2. Low-fire
PG max 16 mbar
PG min = = = 1 mbar (Dp chart = 20 1 = 19 mbar)
RV 2
16
VGas max 200 m 3 / h 3
VGmin = = = 50 m3 corresponding to h = 39 m / h air
RV 4
Point PB in the highlighted area
- Selected valve size VGD40.080
Point PB must be on or to the right of the minimum flow characteristic.
10/12

Combinations of VGD40... and actuator (here with the SKP10... and SKP20...)
Valve proving device "A" and pressure switch (Pi)

Pi
Valve proving device "A"

PM
Valve proving device "A" and pressure switch (Pi)
Valve proving device "A"
100 2
92,5
57 (Some ancillary units are non - Siemens HVAC products)
7631m07e/0502
2 pressure switches (PM, Pi)
61
30
107
310
210,2
Ancillary units
453
Legend
Pi Inlet pressure upstream of valve 1
PM Intermediate chamber pressure upstream of valve 2
11/12

Dimensions (not to scale)
VGD20... SKP... Z SKP... Z: VGD20.403 G / RP 3/4"

VGD20.503 G / RP 3/4"
19 50 63,5 63,5 50 19 VGD20.503A G / RP 1"
Rp1/4" G3/4"
Rp1/4"
AGA41 or AGA51
61
SW80
DN
19,5
103
10
AGA41 or AGA51
11/2": 27,5
265
30
7631m05e/0801
VGD40...
Rp 1/4
F G 3/4" Rp 1/4
E
M
B
P
G
D
K C
L
A
Pressure switch plate
Pressure switch plate
Rp 1/8
Pm
Q
58
Pm
2
J
I
22
22
Pi
2
16
17
11
5
Pilot gas connection

7631m02e/0101
7
Pm
Rp 1/8
Pi
36
54
Dimensions
Type reference DN A B C D E F G I J K L M P Q
VGD40.040 40 240 195 168 115 58 88 110 77 79 20 50 2 19 70
VGD40.050 50 240 202 174 115 58 88 125 77 79 20 50 2 19 70
VGD40.065 65 290 215 194 118 60 102 145 87 90 30 60 4 19 81
VGD40.080 80 310 236 204 132 54 107 160 90 92 30 60 2 19 88
VGD40.100 100 350 259 227 145 43 131 180 105 108 41 71 13 19 99
VGD40.125 125 400 305 255 175 31 150 210 119 122 41 71 25 19 113
VGD40.150 150 480 335 293 188 20 168 240 140 143 39 69 36 23 134
2002 Siemens Landis & Staefa Produktion GmbH

Subject to change
12/12

opmaak MU1R/9127/R2 30-06-1998 09:16 Pagina 1
UNIVERSAL GAS VALVES

VE4000 SERIES
CLASS A GAS VALVES
INSTRUCTION SHEET
Duty cycle
Coil suitable for permanent energization.
Opening time
A,B,S version : less than 1 second
C version : adjustable from 1 up to 30 seconds at rated capacity.
The opening characteristic is factory set at approx. 6 seconds under
the following conditions:
- measured at 80% of rated capacity
- 30 mbar supply pressure
- 20 C
- 2,5 mbar pressure drop
- no step pressure
Due to the influence of ambient temperature (-15 ... 60 C) the
adjusted opening time of 6 seconds measured at 80% of adjusted
flow rate can vary +/- 4 seconds.
Closing time VE....A, B, C and S series

Less than 1 second.
Maximum working frequency

A,B,S version : 20 cycles per minute
C version : 1 cycle per minute
SPECIFICATIONS
Pipe sizes 1000 series
Inlet an outlet 3/8 up to 3 internal parallel pipe thread according to
ISO 7-1
Pipe sizes 3000 series

Flanged connection DN65, DN80 and DN100 according to
PN16 ISO 7005-1.
APPLICATION
Torsion and bending stress
These series class A gas valves are used for control and regulation Pipe connections meet group 2 according to EN161 requirements.
of gaseous fluids in gas power burners, atmospheric gas boilers,
melting furnaces, incinerators and other gas consuming appliances. Ambient temperature
-15 ... 60 C
Models
Subject to change without notice. Printed in the Netherlands.
VE Series solenoid gas valves Supply voltage:

VE4010 (DN10) VE8010 (DN10) 220 ... 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz
VE4015 (DN15) VE8015 (DN15) 110 Vac, 50/60 Hz
VE4020 (DN20) VE8020 (DN20) 24 Vac, 50/60 Hz
VE4025 (DN25) VE8025 (DN25) 24 ... 28 Vdc
VE4032 (DN32) VE8032 (DN32) The applicable voltage is led to the solenoid coil via a rectifying
VE4040 (DN40) VE8040 (DN40) circuit.
VE4050 (DN50) VE8050 (DN50)
VE4065 (DN65) Maximum operating pressure
VE4080 (DN80) Rp 3/8 ... 2 1/2 types, 200 and 360 mbar
VE4100 (DN100) Rp 3 ... 4 types, 200 mbar
Suffix Electrical connection

A : Non regulated ON/OFF Plug connection according to PG 11.
B : Flow regulation
C : Flow regulation and adjustable opening Coil insulation solenoid valves
S : ON/OFF, Normally Open Insulation material according to class F.
With or without 1/4 bottom plug.

With or without Closed Position Indication (CPI) switch.
MU1R-9127-9704-R2-NE
Operational voltage range

The gas valve will function satisfactory between 85% and
! WARNING
110% of rated voltage. Tightness test after installation
. Spray all pipe connections and gaskets with a good quality gas
Enclosure leak detection spray.
IP 54, unless otherwise specified . Start the application and check for bubbles. If a leak is found in
a pipe connection, remake the joint.
Capacity in m3/h air at p = 2.5 mbar A gasket leak can usually be stopped by tightening the moun-
DN10 5.0 ting screws. Otherwise, replace the gas valve
DN15 6.4 Electrical connection
DN20 14.8
DN25 16.7
DN32 38.5 ! CAUTION
DN40 47.1 . Switch off power supply before making electrical connections.
DN50 66.7 . Take care that wiring is in accordance with local regulations.
DN65 94.2
DN80 131.0 Use lead wire which can withstand 105 C ambient.
DN100 225.0
The electrical ON/OFF operator is provided with a terminal block for
Strainer electrical connections.
A strainer is incorporated in the gas valve.
Wiring
Follow the instructions supplied by the appliance manufacturer.
INSTALLATION
ADJUSTMENTS AND FINAL CHECKOUT
! WARNING
. Take care that installer is a trained experienced service man. ! WARNING
. Turn off gas supply before starting installation.
. Disconnect power supply to prevent electrical shock and/or Adjustments must be made by qualified persons only.
equipment damage.
VE 4... B series (see fig. 1)
Mounting position
The gas valve can be mounted plus or minus 90 degrees from the Flow rate adjustment
vertical. . Remove the cap screw from top of the coil.
. Place a socket head wrench into the adjustment nut.
Mounting location . Turn wrench counter-clockwise to increase or clockwise to
The distance between the gas valve and the wall/ground, must be at decrease flow rate.
least 30 cm. . Replace cap screw.
! WARNING ! CAUTION
The outlet of a pressure relief valve (VE4000S series) must To ensure a safe closing of the valves, it is essential that voltage
always be connected to the open atmosphere. over the terminals of operators is reduced to 0 volt.
Main gas connection threaded valves NOTE: The flow adjustment of the VE4100 series valves is at the
. Take care that dirt cannot enter the gas valve during handling. bottom of the valve.
. Ensure the gas flows in the same direction as the arrow on the
housing of the gas valve.
. Use a sound taper fitting with thread according to ISO 7-1 VE 4... C series (see fig. 2 and 3)
(BS 21, DIN 2999) or a piece of new properly reamed pipe, free The following characteristics can be adjusted:
from swarf. . flow rate
. Do not thread or tighten the pipe or pipe fitting too far. Otherwise . step pressure
valve distortion and malfunction could result. . opening speed
. Apply a moderate amount of good quality thread compound to
the pipe or fitting only, leaving the two end threads bare, PTFE IMPORTANT
tape may be used as an alternative. To ensure a satisfactory setting of the valve, the pressure
. In order to tighten the pipe in the valve, do not use the actuator drop over the valve should be at least 10% of the supply
as a lever but use a suitable wrench operating on the wrench pressure or 2,5 mbar which ever is the greatest.
boss.
Main gas connection flanged valves Flow rate adjustment (see fig. 2a and 2b)
. Take care that dirt cannot enter the gas valve during handling. . Remove the cap from top of the coil by loosening both screws.
. Ensure the gas flows in the same direction as the arrow on the . Place a wrench on the adjustment hexagon nut.
housing of the gas valve. . Turn wrench counter-clockwise to increase or clockwise to
. Ensure that the inlet and outlet flanges are in line and separated decrease the flow rate.
from each other enough to allow the valve to be mounted . Replace cap on top of the coil.
between them without damaging the gasket.
. Place gasket. If necessary, grease it slightly to keep it in place. Step pressure adjustment (see fig. 2c)
. Mount gas valve between flanges using the bolts for each flange. . Remove the cap from top of the coil by loosening both screws.
. Place a screw driver in the slot of adjustment screw which is
situated in center of the valve.
. Turn screw driver counter-clockwise to increase or clockwise to
decrease step pressure.
. Replace cap on top of the coil.
MU1R-9127-9704-R2-NE 2
Opening speed adjustment (see fig. 2d)

. Remove the cap from top of the coil by loosening both screws.
. Place a screw driver in the slot of the adjustment screw which is
off center line.
. Turn screw driver counter-clockwise to increase the opening
speed and therefor the time till full opening will decrease.
. Turn screw driver clockwise to decrease the opening speed and
therefore the time till full opening will increase.
. Replease cap on top of the coil.
Final checkout of the installation

Set appliance in operation after any adjustment and observe several
complete cycles to ensure that all burner components function
correctly.
Fig. 1
DEUTSCH
ANWENDUNG
Die Gruppe A Gasventile sind verwendbar als Sicherheitsstellgerte
fr das Sichern, Begrenzen, Absperren und Freigeben der Gaszufuhr
bei Gasbrennern, atmosphrischen Gaskesseln, Gas
Spezialheizkesseln, Gasstraen sowie weiteren
Gasverbrauchseinrichtungen. Die Gruppe A Gasventile sind geeig-
net fr Gase nach DVGW-Arbeitsblatt G260/1 und sonstige neutrale
gasfrmige Medien. Die Gruppe A Gasventile sind nach EN161 Fig. 2a
geprft und zu gelassen mit Nr. CE 63AO3075.
Grundtypen
VE Serie Gasabsperrventile Gruppe A
VE4010 (DN10) VE8010 (DN10)
VE4015 (DN15) VE8015 (DN15)
VE4020 (DN20) VE8020 (DN20)
VE4025 (DN25) VE8025 (DN25)
VE4032 (DN32) VE8032 (DN32)
VE4040 (DN40) VE8040 (DN40)
VE4050 (DN50) VE8050 (DN50)
VE4065 (DN65) Fig. 2b
VE4080 (DN80)
VE4100 (DN100)
Ausfhrung A : Nicht einstellbar, ON/OFF.

Ausfhrung B : Einstellbare Hauptgasmenge.
Ausfhrung C : Einstellbare Hauptgasmenge und ffnungs-
charakteristik.
Separat lieferbare Anschluplatine. Antriebsmagnete sind fr dauer-
haften spannungslosen Zustand geeignet.
Fig. 2c
ffnungszeiten:
Ausfhrungen A und B : ffnungszeit < 1 Sekunde.
Ausfhrung C : ffnungszeit einstellbar von 1 bis 30
Sekunden im gesamten Arbeitsbereich.
Die Werkseinstellung ist 6 Sekunden bezogen auf die folgenden
Bedingungen:
- gemessen bei 80% der eingestellten Hauptgasmenge,
- bei 30 mbar Eingangsdruck,
- bei 2,5 mbar Druckverlust,
- keine eingestellte Startgasmenge.
In Abhngigkeit zu der mglichen Umgebungstemperatur Fig. 2d
(-15 C ... 60 C) kann die eingestellte ffnungszeit von 6
Sekunden bei 80% erreichter ffnung um +/- 4 Sekunden variieren.
Schliezeiten
Ausfhrungen A, B und C : < 1 Sekunde Poutlet
Flow regulation
Maximale Arbeitsfrequenz
Ausfhrung A und B : 20 Zyklen in der Minute
Ausfhrung C : 1 Zyklus in der Minute Opening speed regulation
Step pressure
time
Fig. 3
3 MU1R-9127-9704-R2-NE
SPEZIFIKATION Einbaulage
Die Gerte knnen in jeder, um 0 bis 90 von der Lotrechten abwei-
Gewindeanschlu der 1000 Serie chenden Lage eingebaut werden.
Innengewinde Rp 3/8 bis Rp 2 1/2 am Eingang und Ausgang gem Der Magnetantrieb darf nicht nach unten zeigen.
ISO 7-1.
Einbau
Flanschanschlu der 3000 Serie Stellen Sie sicher, da
Flanschverbindung DN65, DN80 und DN100 nach DIN 2633, . Verunreinigungen und Verschmutzungen whrend der Arbeit
PN16 ISO 7005-1. nicht in das Gert eintreten knnen,
. die Gasdurchflurichtung dem auf dem Ventil befindlichen Pfeil
Torsionsmoment und Biegespannung entspricht,
Rohrleitungsanschlu erfllt die Anforderungen der Gruppe 2 nach . die Entfernung zwischen Gasventil und Wand oder Boden min-
EN161. destens 30 cm entspricht.
Zulssige Umgebungstemperatur
-15 ... 60 C.
! WICHTIG
Vor der Inbetriebnahme sind alle Anschluverbindungen und
sonstige Anschlsse zu subern und gegebenenfalls mit
Spannungsversorgung
geeignetem Material (Paste) zu bestreichen und auf
220 ... 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz
Blasenbildung whrend der Druckprobe zu untersuchen.
110 Vac, 50/60 Hz
24 Vac, 50/60 Hz
Ventil mit Gewindeanschlu
24 ... 28 Vdc
Die Anwender bezogene Versorgungsspannung ist bestimmt durch
. Achten Sie darauf, da der Arbeiten keine Verschmutzung in das
Gasventil eindringen kann.
die Auswahl des Magnetantriebes.
. Vergewissern Sie sich, da der Gasdurchflu in die selbe
Richtung fhrt wie der Durchflupfeil am Gasven anzeigt.
Maximaler Betriebsdruck
Rp 3/8 ... 2 1/2, 200 and 360 mbar
. Schrauben Sie das Gewinderohr nicht zu bermig tief bzw. fest
in das Gasventil.
Rp 3 ... 4, 200 mbar
Ventil mit Flanschanschlu
Elektrischer Anschlu
Steckverschraubung Pg 11
. Achten Sie darauf, da der Arbeiten keine Verschmutzung in das
Gasventil eindringen kann.
Isolationsklasse
. Vergewissern Sie sich, da der Gasdurchflu in die selbe
Richtung fhrt wie der Durchflupfeil am Gasven anzeigt.
Isolationsklasse F fr den Magnetantrieb.
Betriebsspannung Elektrische Anschlsse

Der Magnetantrieb arbeitet zwischen 85% und 110% den
Nennspannung von:
! WICHTIG
Schutzart Vor Beginn der elektrischen Anschluarbeiten ist die
Schutzart IP54 nach DIN 40050 Netzspannung zwecks Vermeidung eines elektrischen Schlages
oder einer Beschdigung des Gertes auszuschalten.
Durchflukapazitt 3
Durchflukapazitt in m /h Luft bei einem Druckverlust von 2,5 mbar. Benutzen Sie Kabel die fr eine Temperatur bis 105 C geeignet sind.
DN10 5,0 Der ON/OFF Magnetantrieb ist verdrahtet mit dem Klemmenanschlu-
DN15 6,4 block.
DN20 14,8
DN25 16,7 Verdrahtung
DN32 38,5 Fr die Verdrahtung der VE4000-Ventile ist ein Klemmenblock vorge-
DN40 47,1 sehen. Die Aderfhrung ist im Klemmenblock wie folgt gekennzeich-
DN50 66,7 net:
DN65 94,2 L Phase
DN80 131,0 N Nulleiter
DN100 225,0 Erdung
Sieb
Ein Sieb ist werksseitig am Ventileingang eingebaut. EINSTELLUNGEN UND ENDKONTROLLEN
INSTALLATION ! WICHTIG
Die Einstellungen drfen nur von qualifiziertem Personal
durchgefhrt werden.
! WICHTIG VE4...B Serie (Siehe Bild 1)

Nicht autorisierte Eingriffe in den Aufbau und die Komponenten
des Gertes knnen gefhrlich sein und lschen jeden Einstellung der Hauptgasdurch-flumenge
Garantieanspruch. . Entfernen Sie die Abdeckung am oberen Teil des
. Der Einbau darf nur von qualifiziertem Personal Magnetantriebes.
vorgenommen werden. . Stecken Sie den Imbuschlssel in das vorgesehene Sechskant
. Vor Beginn der Arbeiten ist die Gasversorgung abzustellen. ein.
. Vor Beginn der elektrischen Anschluarbeiten ist die . Drehen Sie mit dem Imbuschlssel im Uhrzeigersinn
Netzspannung zwecks Vermeidung eines elektrischen Schlags um die Hauptgasdurchflumenge zu erhhen oder
oder einer Beschdigung des Gertes auszuschalten. gegen den Uhrzeigersinn um die Hauptgasdurchflumenge zu
. Nachdem der Einbau vollendet ist, sind alle notwendigen verringern.
Prfungen durchzufhren. . Bringen Sie die Abdeckung wieder an.
MU1R-9127-9704-R2-NE 4
Modelli
! WICHTIG Elettrovalvole per gas serie VE
Um sicher zu sein, da das Ventil spannungslos schliet, ist die VE4010 (DN10) VE8010 (DN10)
Spannung auf Null Volt (Ventil schliet) zu testen. VE4015 (DN15) VE8015 (DN15)
VE4020 (DN20) VE8020 (DN20)
HINWEIS: Die Einstellung der VE1000 Serie (DN100) ist auf der VE4025 (DN25) VE8025 (DN25)
Unterseite des Ventilkrpers. VE4032 (DN32) VE8032 (DN32)
VE4040 (DN40) VE8040 (DN40)
VE4050 (DN50) VE8050 (DN50)
VE4...C Serie (Siehe Bild 2 und 3) VE4065 (DN65)
Die folgenden Einstellungen knnen durchgefhrt werden: VE4080 (DN80)
. Hauptgasdurchflumenge VE4100 (DN100)
. Startgasmenge
. ffnungscharakteristik A : APERTO/CHIUSO
B : Con regolatore di portata
WICHTIG C : Con regolatore di portata e regolazione dellapertura
Um eine einwandfreie Funktion des Ventils zu gewhrleisten, S : APERTO/CHIUSO Normalmente Aperta
sollte der Druckverlust ber dem Ventil hchsten 10% des
Eingangsdruckes betragen oder 2,5 mbar nicht berschreiten. Con o senza un foro 1/4, nella parte inferiore del corpo valvola,
per leventuale montaggio di un microinterruttore per la segnalazione
di posizione della valvola.
Einstellung der Hauptgasdurch-flumenge (Siehe Bild 2a und 2b) Con o senza indicazione di valvola chiusa.
. Entfernen Sie die Abdeckung am oberen Teil des
Magnetantriebes Ciclo di lavoro
. Stecken Sie den Imbuschlssel in das vorgesehene Sechskant ein. Bobina adatta per alimentazione permanente.
. Drehen Sie mit dem Imbuschlssel im Uhrzeigersinn um die
Hauptgasdurchflumenge zu erhhen oder gegen den Tempo di apertura
Uhrzeigersinn um die Hauptgasdurchflumenge zu verringern. Versione A,B,S : meno di 1 secondo
. Bringen Sie die Abdeckung wieder an. Versione C : regolabile da 1 a 30 secondi della max portata
Lapertura tarata approssimativamente a 6
Einstellung der Startgasmenge (Siehe Bild 2c) secondi alle seguenti condizioni:
. Lsen Sie zuerst die beiden Halteschrauben an der - misurata all80% max portata
Abdeckkappe am Magnetantrieb und heben Sie diese an. - pressione massima 30 mbar
. Stecken Sie den Schraubenzieher in die vorgesehene Nut in der - 20 C
Mitte der Einstellmechanik. Durch Drehen des Schraubenziehers - D P 2,5 mbar
in Uhrzeigersinn wird die Startgasmenge reduziert oder auf Null - senza scatto rapido
gesetzt und durch Drehen gegen den Uhrzeigersinn wird die In seguito allinfluenza della temperatura ambiente
Startgasmenge erhht. (-15 C ... 60 C) il tempo di apertura di 6 secondi misurato all80%
. Stecken Sie nach Beendigung der Einstellungen die pu variare di +/- 4 secondi
Abdeckkappe wieder auf und verschrauben Sie die beiden
Halteschrauben. Tempo di chiusura
. Ab Werk ist keine Startgasmenge voreingestellt. Meno di 1 secondo.
Einstellung der ffnungs-charakteristik (Siehe Bild 2d) Max cicli al minuto

. Lsen Sie zuerst die beiden Halteschrauben an der Versione A,B,S : 20 cicli al minuto
Abdeckkappe am Magnetantrieb und heben Sie diese ab. Versione C : 1 ciclo al minuto
. Stecken Sie den Schraubenzieher in den vorgesehenen Schlitz
am Rande der Einstellmechanik. Durch Drehen des
Schraubenziehers in Uhrzeigersinn wird die ffnungsgeschwin-
SPECIFICHE
digkeit reduziert und durch Drehen gegen den Uhrzeigersinn wird Collegamenti per la serie 1000
diese erhht. Le filettature di collegamento in ingresso e in uscita sono da 3/8 a 3
. Einstellungen von 1 bis 30 Sekunden sind mglich. gas cilindrica parallela, costruite secondo ISO 7-1
. Stecken Sie nach Beendigung der Einstellungen die
Abdeckkappe wieder auf und verschrauben Sie die beiden Collegamenti per la serie 3000
Halteschrauben. La connessione tramite flange da DN 65, DN 80 e DN 100 secondo
. Ab Werk sind 6 Sekunden voreingestellt fr das Erreichen von PN16 ISO 7005-1 (UNI 2278-67).
80% der eingestellten Hauptgasmenge.
Sollecitazione torsione e di flessione
Abschlieender Check der Installation Le valvole soddisfano i requisiti del gruppo 2
Nach allen Montagen und Einstellungen setzen Sie das Gert unter secondo quanto richiesto dalla norma Europea EN161.
Spannung und beobachten Sie die Funktionen auch im
Zusammenhang mit den nachfolgenden Gerten. Sind Strungen Temperatura di esercizio
erkennbar protokollieren Sie diese und suchen nach den Fehler. -15 ... 60 C
Tensione di alimentazione
ITALIANO 220 ... 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz
110 Vca, 50/60 HZ
24 Vca, 50/60 Hz
APPLICAZIONI 24 ... 28 Vcc
Per le diverse tensioni di alimentazione sono necessarie le apposite
Queste serie di elettrovalvole in classe A sono utilizzate per il controllo bobine con il circuito elettrico inerente.
e la regolazione dei fluidi gassosi in bruciatori di gas, caldaie atmosfe-
riche, forni industriali, inceneritori, e altre applicazioni funzionanti a gas. Pressione max di esercizio
Rp 3/8 ... 2 1/2, 200 e 360 mbar
Rp 3 ... 4, 200 mbar
5 MU1R-9127-9704-R2-NE
Collegamenti elettrici
Presa di collegamento secondo PG 11.
! ATTENZIONE
Tenuta dopo linstallazione
Classe disolamento della bobina
. Verificare con un prodotto studiato per il rilevamento di fughe
tutti i collegamenti e le guarnizioni.
Il materiale disolamento in classe F.
. Verificare lassenza di bolle. Se viene individuata una perdita
in un collegamento, rifare il giunto.
Campo di variabilit della tensione dalimentazione
La perdita di una guarnizione si pu eliminare serrando le viti
Lelettrovalvola ha un buon funzionamento se la tensione di alimenta-
di fissaggio. Altrimenti, sostituire lelettrovavola.
zione compresa tra 85% e il 110% della tensione nominale
Connessione elettrica
Grado di protezione
IP 54 standard ! ATTENZIONE
Capacit in m /h daria con un p =2.5 mbar
3
. Prima di eseguire i collegamenti elettrici distaccare linterrutto-
re di corrente.
DN10
DN15
5.0
6.4
. Assicurarsi che linstallazione sia eseguita rispettando le
vigenti norme locali.
DN20 14.8
DN25 16.7 Usare conduttori elettrici adatti per una temperatura ambiente 105 C.
DN32 38.5
DN40 47.1 Lattuatore elettrico della valvola provvisto di un connettore per col-
DN50 66.7 legamenti elettrici.
DN65 94.2
DN80 131.0
DN100 225.0 Cablaggio
Seguire le istruzioni generali di applicazione.
Filtro
Un filtro incorporato nellelettrovalvola
REGOLAZIONI E CONTROLLI
! ATTENZIONE
. Linstallazione deve essere eseguita da personale specializzato. ! ATTENZIONE
. Chiudere il gas prima dellinstallazione. La regolazione deve essere eseguita solo da personale
. Togliere corrente prima dellinstallazione. qualificato.
Serie VE 4... B (vedi fig. 1)

INSTALLAZIONE
Regolazione della portata
Posizione di montaggio . Togliere il coperchio sulla parte superiore della bobina.
La valvola pu essere montata in una posizione compresa tra 90 . Inserire una chiave esagonale nella parte centrale superiore.
dallasse verticale. . Girare in senso orario per diminuire la portata, e in senso antiora-
rio per aumentare.
! ATTENZIONE . Rimettere il coperchio e serrare.
La valvola di sfiato, serie VE4000S, deve sempre essere
collegata con luscita in aria libera. ! ATTENZIONE
Per la chiusura della valvola necessario che la tensione ai
Locazione di montaggio terminali della bobina sia 0 volt.
La distanza tra la valvola ed il pavimento deve essere minimo 30 cm.
NOTA: Il regolatore di portata della valvola serie VE4100 situato
Montaggio delle valvole filettate nella parte inferiore.
.
Evitare che residui metallici o sporcizia penetrino nella valvola
durante il montaggio.
.
Verificare che il flusso del gas corrisponda al senso della freccia Serie VE 4... C (vedi fig. 2 e 3)
indicata sul corpo valvola. Le seguenti caratteristiche possono essere regolate:
.
Tenere presente che la filettatura della valvola corrisponda alla . Portata
norma ISO 7-1 (BS 21, DIN 2999).
. . Scatto iniziale rapido
Verificare che la lunghezza del filetto della tubazione non sia
troppo lunga, per evitare di danneggiare il corpo valvola.
. Velocit di apertura
.
Per la tenuta usare appropriato mastice per tubazione; in alterna- IMPORTANTE
tiva usare nastro in PTFE. Per ottenere una buona regolazione necessario che la
.
Non usare la bobina come leva per lavvitamento sulla tubazione, caduta di pressione sia almeno il 10% della pressione di ingres-
ma usare lapposito utensile. so e comunque non inferiore a 2,5 mbar.
Regolazione della portata (vedi fig. 2a e 2b)
Montaggio delle valvole flangiate
. . Dopo aver svitato le viti, togliere il coperchio della parte superiore.
Evitare che residui metallici o sporcizia penetrino nella valvola
. Usare una chiave per esagono da 12 mm.
durante il montaggio.
.
Verificare che il flusso del gas corrisponda al senso della freccia
. Girare in senso orario per diminuire la portata o in senso antiora-
rio per aumentare.
indicata sul corpo valvola.
.
Verificare che le flange di ingresso e di uscita siano perfettamen-
. Rimettere il coperchio e avvitare le viti.
te parallele e che la distanza tra di esse permetta linserimento
Regolazione dello scatto iniziale rapido (vedi fig. 2c)
della apposita guarnizione.
. . Dopo aver svitato le viti, togliere il coperchio della parte superiore .
Inserire le due guarnizioni, se necessario servirsi di un piccolo
. Agire con un cacciavite sulla vite di regolazione centrale.
strato di grasso.
.
Inserire la valvola tra le flange e serrare gli appositi bulloni.
. Girare in senso orario per diminuire lo scatto o in senso antiorario
per aumentare.
. Rimettere il coperchio e avvitare le viti.
MU1R-9127-9704-R2-NE 6
Regolazione della velocit di apertura (vedi fig. 2d) Diamtre du tuyau pour la srie 3000
. Dopo aver svitato le viti, togliere il coperchio della parte superiore . Raccordements bride DN65, DN80 et DN100 selon la norme
. Agire con un cacciavite sulla vite di regolazione laterale. PN16 ISO 7005-1.
. Girare in senso orario per diminuire la velocit o in senso antiora-
rio per aumentare. Rsistance aux torsions et flexions
. Rimettere il coperchio e avvitare le viti. Les raccordements aux tuyaux sont conformes aux spcifications du
groupe 2 de la norme EN161.
Controllo finale di installazione
Dopo ogni operazione di regolazione controllare attentamente che il Temprature ambiante
funzionamento di tutti i componenti del bruciatore sia corretto. -15 ... 60 C
Tension nominale dalimentation

FRANAIS 220 ... 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz
110 Vac, 50/60 Hz
APPLICATION 24 Vac, 50/60 Hz
24 ... 28 Vdc
Les vannes gaz de classe A sont utilises pour le contrle et la 12 Vdc
rgulation du dbit de gaz des brleurs air souffl et atmosphri- La tension applique la bobine est issue dun circuit redresseur.
ques, des fours, incinrateurs etc...
Presssion de service maximale
Modles Rp 3/8 ... 2 1/2, 200 et 360 mbar
Vannes gaz VE bobine lectromagntique Rp 3 ... 4, 200 mbar
VE4010 (DN10) VE8010 (DN10)
VE4015 (DN15) VE8015 (DN15) Connections lectriques
VE4020 (DN20) VE8020 (DN20) Le connecteur est conforme PG 11.
VE4025 (DN25) VE8025 (DN25)
VE4032 (DN32) VE8032 (DN32) Isolation de la bobine lectromagntique des vannes
VE4040 (DN40) VE8040 (DN40) Le matriau disolation est conforme la classe F.
VE4050 (DN50) VE8050 (DN50)
VE4065 (DN65) Variation de la tension dalimentation
VE4080 (DN80) La vanne gaz fonctionne normalement entre 85% et 110% de la
VE4100 (DN100) tension nominale.
Suffix Degr de protection

A : TOUT-OU-RIEN IP54 si aucune autre indication nest spcifie.
B : A dbit ajustable
C : Avec rglage du dbit maximum et minimum et ouverture Capacit en m3/h dair p =2.5 mbar
progressive. DN10 5.0
S : TOUT-OU-RIEN normalement ouverte DN15 6.4
DN20 14.8
Corps de vanne avec ou sans piquage 1/4 pour contact de contrle DN25 16.7
de position. DN32 38.5
Avec ou sans indicateur de position ferme. DN40 47.1
DN50 66.7
Temps de fonctionnement DN65 94.2
La bobine peut tre en permanence sous tension. DN80 131.0
DN100 225.0
Temps douverture
Versions A,B,S : moins dune seconde. Tamis
Version C : rglable de 1 30 secondes la capacit Un tamis est incorpor dans le corps de vanne
nominale.
Le temps douverture de la vanne est rgl lors de la fabrication
approximativement 6 secondes dans les conditions suivantes: INSTALLATION
- mesur 80% de la capacit nominale
- pression dentre: 30 mbar
- temprature ambiante: 20 C ! ATTENTION
- chute de pression dans la vanne: 2.5 mbar . Linstallateur doit tre un technicien expriment.
- Pas de pression de premier dbit . Couper lalimentation en gaz avant de dmarrer linstallation.
Le temps douverture ajust 6 secondes peut varier de +/- 4 . Couper la tension dalimentation pour viter chocs lectriques
secondes en fonction de la temprature ambiante (-15 ... 60 C). et/ou dterioration de lquipement.
Temps de fermeture des sries VE....A, B, C et S Montage de lquipement

Moins dune seconde. La vanne peut tre monte faisant un angle de plus ou moins 90
degrs avec la verticale.
Frquence de service maximale La distance entre la vanne et le mur/sol doit tre dau moins 30 cm.
Versions A,B,S : 20 cycles par minute
Version C : 1 cycle par minute ! ATTENTION
La sortie dune vanne de mise latmosphre (srie VE4000S)
doit toujours tre raccorde latmosphre.
SPECIFICATIONS
Connection des vannes principales filetage
Diamtre du tuyau pour la srie 1000 .
La poussire ne doit pas pntrer dans la vanne pendant la
Entre et sortie de 3/8 3 pouces. Filetage interne parallle selon la manutention.
norme ISO 7-1. .
Le dbit de gaz doit tre dans la mme direction que la flche sur
le botier de la vanne.
7 MU1R-9127-9704-R2-NE
. Utiliser des manchettes filetes selon ISO 7-1 (BS 21, DIN 2999) ou ! ATTENTION
raccorder un tuyau trs propre. Pour assurer une fermeture sre des vannes il est essentiel que
. Ne pas serrer le tuyau trop fort, ce qui pourrait endommager la la tension aux bornes de la bobine soit rduite 0 volt.
vanne et conduire un disfonctionnement.
. Appliquer une quantit modre de produit pour filetage de NOTE: Le rglage du dbit des vannes de la srie VE4100 est au bas
bonne qualit sur le tuyau, laissant les deux derniers pas du file- de la vanne.
tage nus. un joint tflon pouvant ventuellement tre utilis
comme alternative. Srie VE4...C (voir fig. 2 et 3)
. Ne pas utiliser la vanne comme levier pour serrer le tuyau dans la Les caractristiques suivantes peuvent tre ajustes:
vanne, mais une cl adquate. . Dbit
. Pression de premier dbit
Connection des vannes principales raccordement bride
.
La poussire ne doit pas pntrer dans la vanne pendant la
. Vitesse douverture
manutention. IMPORTANT
.
Le dbit de gaz doit tre dans la mme direction que la flche sur La chute de pression dans la vanne doit tre suprieure ou
le botier de la vanne. gale 10% de la pression dalimentation et infrieure
.
Les brides dentre et de sortie doivent tre alignes et suffisa- 2.5 mbar.
ment spares lune de lautre pour permettre le montage de la
vanne sans endommager le joint dtanchit.
.
Placer le joint. Si ncessaire, le graisser un peu pour le maintenir Rglage du dbit (voir fig. 2a et 2b)
. Enlever le bouchon au sommet de la vanne en dvissant les
en place.
.
Fixer la vanne entre les brides laide des boulons.
.
deux vis.
Placer une cl sur lcrou tte hexagonale.
! ATTENTION . Tourner la cl dans le sens des aiguilles dune montre pour dimi-
nuer le dbit ou dans le sens inverse pour laugmenter.
Effectuer un test dtanchit aprs linstallation
. Enduir tous les raccordements de tuyaux et la jonction au
. Replacer le bouchon.
niveau du joint torique avec une bonne quantit d}eau savon-
Rglage du premier dbit (voir fig. 2c)
neuse ou tout autre produit spcialis destin cet usage
Effectuer le contrle et rechercher toutes traces de bulle.
. Si la moindre fuite est dtecte sur un raccordement, reffectu-
.
deux vis.
Placer un tournevis dans la rainure de la vis dajustement situe
er le montage sur le joint concern.
au centre de la vanne.
Connections lectriques . Tourner le tournevis dans le sens des aiguilles dune montre pour
diminuer le premier dbit ou dans le sens inverse pour laugmen-
ter.
! ATTENTION .
. Couper la source de tension avant de procder aux connec- Replacer le bouchon.
tions lectriques.
. Le cblage doit tre conforme aux rglements en vigueur. Rglage de la vitesse douverture (voir fig. 2d)
Les fils lectriques utiliss doivent pouvoir supporter une temprature deux vis.
ambiante de 105 C. . Placer un tournevis dans la rainure de la vis dajustement (voir
fig. 2d pour la position de la vis ).
Loprateur lectrique TOUT-OU-RIEN est fourni avec un bloc per- . Tourner le tournevis dans le sens inverse des aiguilles dune
mettant de raliser les connections lectriques. montre pour augmenter la vitesse douverture et donc diminuer le
temps douverture de la vanne.
Cblage . Tourner le tournevis dans le sens des aiguilles dune montre pour
Suivre les instructions fournies par le fabricant de lappareil. diminuer la vitesse douverture et donc augmenter le temps
douverture de la vanne.
. Replacer le bouchon.
AJUSTEMENTS ET VERIFICATION FINALE
Vrification finale de linstallation
Mettre le dispositif en route et sassurer que tous les
! ATTENTION appareils fonctionnent correctement pendant plusieurs
Les rglages doivent tre faits par une personne qualifie. cycles.
Srie VE4...B (voir fig. 1)
Rglage du dbit
.
Dvisser le bouchon au sommet de la vanne.
.
Utiliser une cl BTR.
.
Tourner la cl dans le sens des aiguilles dune montre pour dimi-
nuer le dbit ou dans le sens inverse pour laugmenter.
.
Revisser le bouchon.
Combustion Controls Center Europe Honeywell UGV s.r.l. Helping You Control Your World
Honeywell B.V. Via Ferrero, 16
Phileas Foggstraat 7 10090 CASCINE-VICA RIVOLI (TO)
7821 AJ Emmen TURIN
The Netherlands Italy
Tel : +31 (0)591 69 59 11 Tel : +39 (0)11 957 83 11
Fax : +31 (0)591 69 52 00 Fax : +39 (0)11 957 83 22
MU1R-9127-9704-R2-NE 8
UNIVERSAL GAS VALVES
VF5000 Series
MANUALLY OPERATED BUTTERFLY VALVE
INSTRUCTION SHEET
Maximum operating pressure

500 mbar
Torsion and bending stress
Pipe connections meet group 2 according to EN161
requirements.
Ambient temperature range
--15 ... 100 C
Valve body
Aluminium alloy die--cast
Standards and Approvals
The VF5000 Series manually operated butterfly valves
conform with the following EC directives:
Gas Appliance Directive (90/396/EEC)
PIN: CE--0063AR1583
INSTALLATION
See Figure 1. Installation drawing VF5000A on page 2.
IMPORTANT
1. Read these instructions carefully, failure to follow
the instructions could damage the product or
cause hazardous condition.
2. Check the ratings given in the instructions and on
APPLICATION the product to make sure the product is suitable
for your application.
These series manually operated butterfly valves are used to 3. The installation has to be carried out by qualified
control and govern the burner airlock of gas burners. The personnel only.
VF5000 Series can be equipped with the MT4000 Series 4. Carry out a thorough checkout when installation
Subject to change without notice. Printed in the Netherlands.
and MF4000 Series servomotors. The choice of the servo is completed.

motor depends on the working pressure and size of the
butterfly valve. The MF4000 Series is typically used in 360 Mounting and orientation
mbar maximum working pressure applications and on sizes The gas valve can be mounted in all positions (only without
DN50 and larger. motor).
Mounting location
The distance between the gas valve and wall/ground must be
SPECIFICATIONS at least 30 cm.
Models
! WARNING
Turn off gas supply before installation.
VF5000A3
Dimensions Main gas connection
See Figure. 1. Installation drawing VF5000A on page 2. 1. Take care that dirt does not enter the gas valve during
Pipe sizes handling
Inlet and outlet flanged connection DN25 up to DN150 2. Place the gaskets. If necessary grease it slightly to
according to PN16 ISO 7005--1. keep it in place.
Capacity 3. Mount the gas valve between the flanges using the
See Fig. 2. Capacity curves VF5000A Series on page 5. bolts for each flange.
MU1R--9147 9610R0--NE
Passing
g Overall dimensions (mm)
125 DN L D1 D2 K*
112 25 96 73 71 85
L
32 84 84 81 100
40 94 94 91 110
50 109 109 105 125
30
65 129 129 126 145

80 144 144 141 160
100 164 164 161 180
DN 125 194 194 191 210
D1 150 220 220 217 240
*K = diameter bolt circle
D2
K
Fig. 1. Installation drawing VF5000A
Torsions-- und Biegespannung
WARNING Die Rohranschlsse entsprechen den Anforderungen nach
Tightness test after installation EN161, Gruppe 2.
: spray all pipe connections and gaskets with a gas Umgebungstemperaturbereich
leak detection spray. --15 ... 100 C
: Start the application and check for bubbles. If a Krper
leak is detected in a pipe connection, remake the Aluminium Legierung
joint. Normen und Genehmigungen
Die Serie VF5000 handbettigter Drosselklappen entspricht
den folgenden EG--Richtlinien:
ADJUSTMENT AND CHECKOUT Gasgerterichtlinie (90/396/EWG)
PIN: CE--0063AR1583
See capacity curves on page 5.
DEUTSCH INSTALLATION
Siehe Abb. 1. Montagezeichnung VF5000A auf Seite 2.
ANWENDUNG WICHTIG
1. Nicht autorisierte Eingriffe in den Aufbau und die
Diese Serie von handbettigten Drosselklappen dient zur Komponenten des Gertes knnen gefrlich sein
Steuerung und Regelung der Brenner--Luftabsperrung bei mit und lschen jeden Garantieanspruch
gasfrmigem und flssigem Brennstoff gefeuerten Brennern. 2. Der Einbau darf nur von qualifiziertem Personal
Die Serie VF5000 kann mit den Servomotoren der Serie vorgenommen werden.
MT4000 und MF4000 ausgerstet werden. Die Wahl des
3. Vor Beginn der Arbeiten ist die Gasversorgung
Servomotors richtet sich nach dem Arbeitsdruck und der
abzustellen.
Gre der Drosselklappe. Klappen der Serie MF4000 werden
blicherweise bei Anwendungen mit einem maximalen 4. Kontrollieren Sie die in der Anleitung und auf dem
Arbeitsdruck von 360 mbar und bei Gren von DN50 und Produkt angegebenen Nennwerte, um
darber verwendet. sicherzustellen, da sich das Produkt fr Ihre
Anwendung eignet.
5. Nachdem der Einbau vollendet ist, sind alle
TECHNISCHE DATEN notwendigen Prfungen durchzufhren.
Montage und Ausrichtung
Modelle Die Gasklappe kann in jedem Flach montiert werden (nur
VF5000A3 ohne motor).
Abmessungen Montageort
Siehe Abb. 1. Montagezeichnung VF5000A auf Seite 2. Der Abstand zwischen der Gasklappe und der Wand/dem
Rohrgren Boden mu wenigstens 30 cm betragen.
Eintritt und Austritt mit Flanschverbindung DN25 bis DN150
nach PN16 ISO 7005--1. WICHTIG
Leistung Drehen Sie vor der Montage die Gaszufuhr ab.
Siehe Abb. 2. Leistungskurven Serie VF5000A auf Seite 5. Hauptgasanschlu
Maximaler Betriebsdruck 1. Achten Sie darauf, da whrend der Handhabung kein
500 mbar Schmutz in die Gasklappe eindringt.
MU1R--9147 9610R0--NE 2
2. Bringen Sie die Dichtungen an. Ntigenfalls leicht
einfetten, um sie an ihrem Platz zu halten.
INSTALLAZIONE
3. Montieren Sie die Gasklappe zwischen den Flanschen Vedi Figura 1. a page 2 del disegno dinstallazione del
mit Hilfe der zu jedem Flansch gehrenden Schrauben. VF5000A
IMPORTANTE
WICHTIG 1. Leggete con attenzione queste istruzioni, la non
Dichtigkeitsprfung nach Montage osservanza delle istruzioni pu dannegiare il
Versehen Sie alle Rohranschlsse und O--Ringe prodotto o determinare una condizione di
mit einer starken Lsung aus Seife und Wasser. pericolo.
Beginnen Sie mit der Beaufschlagung und 2. Controllate i valori forniti nelle istruzioni e sul
kontrollieren Sie auf Blasenbildung. Wird in einem prodotto per assicurarvi che il prodotto sia adatto
Rohranschlu ein Leck festgestellt, mu die alluso che intendete farne.
Verbindung neu hergestellt werden. 3. Linstallazione deve essere eseguita solo da
personale qualificato
EINSTELLUNGEN UND 4. Eseguite un controllo approfondito dopo il
completamento dellinstallazione.
ENDKONTROLLEN Montaggio e assetto
La valvola pu essere montata in qualsiasi posizione (solo se
Siehe Abb. 2. Leistungskurven Serie VF5000 auf Seite 5. privo di motore).
ITALIANO Posizione di montaggio
La distanza tra la valvola e la parete o il pavimento deve
essere di almeno 30 cm.
APPLICAZIONI
AVVERTENZA
Questa serie di valvole a farfalla a funzionamento manuale Interrompere lalimentazione del gas prima di iniziare
vengono utilizzate per controllare e regolare lafflusso daria linstallazione.
nei bruciatori a gas. La serie VF5000 pu essere dotata dei
servomotori sia della serie MT4000 che della serie MF4000. Collegamento della valvola
La scelta del servomotore dipende dalla pressione di 1. Fate attenzione che non entri della sporcizia nella
funzionamento e dalle dimensioni della valvola a farfalla. La valvola durante linstallazione.
serie MF4000 solitamente adatta ad applicazioni con una 2. Mettete le guarnizioni in posizione. Se necessario
pressione massima di funzionamento di 360 mbar e con ingrassatele leggermente per tenerle in posizione.
dimensioni di DN50 o superiori.
3. Montate la valvola tra le flange utilizzando i bulloni per
ciascuna flangia.
SPECIFICHE
AVVERTENZA
Modelli Prova di tenuta dopo linstallazione
VF5000A3 : Spruzzate tutti i collegamenti della tubazione e le
Dimensioni guarnizioni con un prodotto per il rilevamento delle
Vedi Fig.1. Schema dinstallazione VF5000A a pag.2. fughe.
: Avviate lapparecchiatura e verificate lassenza di
Collegamenti
bolle. Se viene riscontrata una perdita in uno dei
Flange di collegamento in ingresso ed uscita sono da DN25 collegamenti della tubazione, rieseguite il giunto.
fino a DN150 secondo PN16 ISO 7005--1.
Portate
Vedi Fig. 2. Curve di portata a pag. 5 REGOLAZIONE E CONTROLLI
Massima pressione di funzionamento
Vedi Fig. 2. Curve di portata a pag. 5
500 mbar
Sollecitazione di torsione e flessione FRANAIS
I collegamenti soddisfano i requisiti del gruppo 2 secondo la
normativa EN 161.
APPLICATION
Temperatura desercizio
--15 ... 100 C Cette srie de vannes papillon commande manuelle est
Corpo valvola utilise pour contrler et grer ladmission dair de brleurs
Fusione in lega dalluminio utilisant des combustibles gazeux et liquides. La srie VF
peut tre quipe des servomoteurs des sries
Normative e certificazioni
MT4000 et MF4000. Le choix du servomoteur dpend de la
La serie di valvole a farfalla a funzionamento manuale pression de fonctionnement et des dimensions de la vanne
VF5000 sono conformi alle seguenti direttive CE: papillon. La srie MF4000 est typiquement utilise pour des
Direttiva sulle apparecchiature a gas (90/396/EEC) applications des pressions de fonctionnement allant jusqu
PIN: CE--0063AR1583 360 mbars et de dimensions DN50 et suprieures.
3 MU1R--9147 9610RO--NE
2. Vrifiez les donnes mentionnes dans les
SPECIFICATIONS instructions et sur le produit afin de vous assurer
que le produit convient votre application.
Modles 3. Seul du personnel qualifi peut se charger de
VF5000A3 linstallation.
Dimensions 4. Effectuez un contrle minutieux lorsque
linstallation est termine.
Voir la Fig. 1.Dimensions VF5000 Series, page 2
Montage et orientation
Dimensions des tuyaux
Il ny a pas de restriction quant langle de montage du
Entre et sortie avec raccord brid de DN25 DN150,
monteur.
conformment PN16 ISO 7005--1.
Endroit de montage
Capacit La distance entre la vanne gaz et le mur/le sol doit tre au
Voir la courbe de capacit du raccord brid, page 5. moins de 30 cm.
Pression de fonctionnement maximale
500 mbars ATTENTION
Contraintes de torsion et de flexion Coupez lalimentation en gaz avant de procder
Les raccords de tuyau rpondent au groupe 2 selon les linstallation.
exigences imposes par EN161.
Raccordement lalimentation en gaz
Plage de temprature ambiante 1. Veillez ce quaucune souillure ne sinsre dans la
--15 ... 100C vanne gaz au cours des oprations.
Corps de la vanne 2. Placez les joints. Si ncessaire, graissez--les
Aluminium lgrement afin de les maintenir en place.
Normes et approbations 3. Montez la vanne gaz entre les brides en utilisant les
La srie VF5000 de vannes papillon commande manuelle boulons pour chaque bride.
est conforme aux directives CE suivantes:
Directive sur les appareils gaz (90/396/CEE) ATTENTION
PIN: CE--0063AR1583 Effectuez un test dtanchit aprs linstallation
Enduisez tous les raccordements de tuyaux et les joints
INSTALLATION toriques dune solution concentre de savon.
Admettez le gaz et vrifiez sil ny a pas de bulles. Si vous
dtectez une fuite dans un raccordement de tuyau,
Voir Fig. 1.Schma dinstallation VF5000A, page 2. effectuez les rparations ncessaires.
IMPORTANT
1. Lisez attentivement ces instructions. Le RELAGE ET CONTROLE
non--respect de ces instructions risque
dendommager le produit ou de provoquer une Voir la courbe de capacit du raccord brid, page 5.
situation dangereuse.
MU1R--9147 9610R0--NE 4
6 60
5 50
4 40
DN150
3 30
DN125
2 20
DN100
DN80
p (mbar)
p (kPa)
1 10 DN65
0.8 8
a a DN50
0.6 6
0.5 5
DN40
0.4 4 DN32
0.3 3 DN25
0.2 2
Vn (m3/h)
0.1 1
Air dv=1
Methane dv 0.64 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 300 400 600 800 1000 2000 3000 4000 6000 8000
20 30 40 50 60 80 100 200 300 400 600 8001000 2000 3000 6000 10000
Fig. 2. Capacity curves VF5000 Series (capacity in m3/h air at ap=2,5 mbar (SG=1 at 1013 mbar, 15)
&RPEXVWLRQ &RQWUROV &HQWHU (XURSH +RQH\ZHOO 8*9 VUO +HOSLQJ <RX &RQWURO <RXU :RUOG
+RQH\ZHOO %9 9LD )HUUHUR
3KLOHDV )RJJVWUDDW &$6&,1(9,&( 5,92/, 72
$- (PPHQ 7XULQ ,WDO\
7KH 1HWKHUODQGV 7HO
7HO )D[
)D[
5 MU1R--9147 9610RO--NE
RIV 7224
Valvola a sfera M/F
passaggio totale PN 5
(EN 331 MOP 5-20)
maniglia a farfalla sigillabile alluminio
Disegni tecnici e tavole
DN Codice F H L S CH KG PN P/box
1/4" 077224000002 10 12 38 52 51 17 0,12 5 30
3/8" 077224000003 10 13,5 40 52 52 20 0,13 5 30
1/2" 077224000004 15 16 45 60 66 25 0,21 5 10
3/4" 077224000005 20 17,5 53 73 76 31 0,36 5 10
1" 077224000007 25 21 57 73 91 38 0,57 5 10
Vantaggi
Certificazioni
ADVANTICA ITALGAS AGA

Unione Europea Italia Australia
ITALGAS AGA
Italia Australia
RIV
Rubinetterie Italiane Velatta S.p.A. - Via delle Acacie, 8 Zona Industriale D4 - 28075 Grignasco (NO) - Italy
Tel +39 0163 4151 Fax + 39 0163 411914 E-Mail riv-vg@riv-vg.com Web http://www.riv-vg.com
Capitale sociale 516.000 i.v. - Reg. Imprese di Novara N 00469610026 - R.E.A. di Novara N 170397
Numero Meccanografico NO009263 - Codice Fiscale: 00469610026 - Partita IVA: IT 01399720034
2008 Rubinetterie Italiane Velatta S.p.A. - Tutti i diritti riservati - Il nome e il marchio sono registrati da RIV Rubinetterie Italiane Velatta S.p.A.
RIV 7224
Dati tecnici
Materiali
1 Corpo Ottone Nichelato CuZn40Pb2 UNI EN 12165
2 Manicotto Ottone Nichelato CuZn40Pb2 UNI EN 12165
3 Sfera Ottone Cromata CuZn40Pb2 UNI EN 12165
4 Sedi P.T.F.E. ASTM D1457
5 O-Ring FKM ASTM D2000
6 O-Ring NBR ASTM D2000
7 Asta Ottone CuZn39Pb3 UNI EN 12164
8 Leva Alluminio Gialla GD-AlSi12Cu2Fe EN AB-46100
9 Vite Acciaio Zincata UNI EN 20898-1
Impieghi Reti ed impianti di distribuzione gas a bassa e media pressione
F/F: ISO 7/1Rp (parallelo), ANSI B1.20.1 (NPT) - M/F: maschio ISO 7/1R (conico), femmina ISO
Attacco
7/1Rp (parallelo)
Limite -20+70 (in assenza di liquido)
Note La pressione max. di utilizzo (PN) si intende a temperatura ambiente di circa 23C.
Perdita di carico Pressione temperatura Coefficienti Kv e Cv

Dimensione Kv Cv
1/4" 4.1 0.0
3/8" 6.3 0.0
1/2" 15.8 0.0
3/4" 29.0 0.0
1" 50.0 0.0
1"1/4 82.0 0.0
1"1/2 184.0 0.0
2" 340.0 0.0
2"1/2 580.0 0.0
3" 940.0 0.0
4" 1,600.0 0.0
RIV Rubinetterie Italiane Velatta S.p.A. - Via delle Acacie, 8 Zona Industriale D4 - 28075 Grignasco (NO) - Italy
RIV 7163
Ball valve F/F
full bore
(EN 331 MOP 5-20)
steel lever handle
Tech drawings and tables
DN Code F H L S CH KG PN P/box
1/4" 077163000002 10 12,5 44,5 80 45 17 0,13 5 30
3/8" 077163000003 10 12,5 44,5 80 45 20 0,15 5 30
1/2" 077163000004 15 17 52 105 59 25 0,25 5 10
3/4" 077163000005 20 18 62 120 69 31 0,40 5 10
1" 077163000007 25 22 66 120 83 38 0,60 5 10
1"1/4 077163000008 32 24 78 135 94 97 0,95 5 6
1"1/2 077163000009 40 24 89 160 102 54,5 1,24 5 4
2" 077163000011 50 28 97 160 124 66 1,88 5 4
2"1/2 077163000013 65 30 142 265 148 86 3,35 5 1
3" 077163000014 80 33 153 265 171 100 5,40 5 1
4" 077163000016 100 40 166 265 206 125 8,84 5 1
Advantages
Approvals
ADVANTICA ITALGAS SVGW AGA PASCAL

European Union Italy Switzerland Australia European Union
ITALGAS SVGW AGA PASCAL

Italy Switzerland Australia European Union
RIV
Rubinetterie Italiane Velatta S.p.A. - Via delle Acacie, 8 Zona Industriale D4 - 28075 Grignasco (NO) - Italy
RIV 7163
Technical data
Materials
1 Body Brass Nickel-plated CuZn40Pb2 UNI EN 12165
Body
2 Brass Nickel-plated CuZn40Pb2 UNI EN 12165
end
Chrome-
3 Ball Brass CuZn40Pb2 UNI EN 12165
plated
4 Seats P.T.F.E. ASTM D1457
5 O-Ring FKM ASTM D2000
6 O-Ring NBR ASTM D2000
7 Stem Brass CuZn39Pb3 UNI EN 12164
GD-
8 Lever Aluminium Yellow EN AB-46100
AlSi12Cu2Fe
UNI EN 20898-
9 Screw Steel Zinc-plated
1
Uses Plants of gas supply at low and medium pressure

F/F: ISO 7/1Rp (parallel), ANSI B1.20.1 (NPT) - M/F: male ISO 7/1R (tapered), female ISO 7/1Rp
Connections
(parallel)
Limit -20+70 (without liquid)
Notes The max.working pressure (PN) means at a room temperature of about 23C.
LoadLossChart TemperaturePression KvCvCoefficients

Size Kv Cv
1/4" 4.1 0.0
3/8" 6.3 0.0
1/2" 15.8 0.0
3/4" 29.0 0.0
1" 50.0 0.0
1"1/4 82.0 0.0
1"1/2 184.0 0.0
2" 340.0 0.0
2"1/2 580.0 0.0
3" 940.0 0.0
4" 1,600.0 0.0
RIV Rubinetterie Italiane Velatta S.p.A. - Via delle Acacie, 8 Zona Industriale D4 - 28075 Grignasco (NO) - Italy
REGOLATORI ALFA 40 ISPESL 0100 PED
Pressure
Equipment
modulo H - H1
REGULATOR - DTENDEUR COPRIM ITALY Garanzia di Qualit Totale
Directive
Colore Prestazioni - Performance - Performances

Color Cod.
Couleur Entrata - Inlet - Entre Uscita - Out - Sortie
Giallo 16 120 mbar

BP Yellow 0,5 5 bar con molle diverse
with various springs
2.50.40
jaune avec ressorts divers
Arancione 110 320 bar

MP Orange
Orange
0,5 5 bar con molle diverse
2.50.42
avec ressorts divers
Rosso 0,31 4 bar

AP Red max 18 bar con molle diverse
2.50.45
Rouge avec ressorts divers
con presa d'impulso 10

BP - MP with inpulse intache
AP
avec prise d'impulsion
Adatto per limpiego di gas non Esecuzioni speciali per:

corrosivi: METANO, GPL, AZOTO... Special execution for: SG 10% RG fino a 5
Suitable for use of not corrosive gases Excutions spciales pour:
REGOLATORE AD AZIONE DIRETTA BILANCIATO
METHANE, LPG, NITROGEN... Direct action control balanced
Apte pour lemploi de gaz pas BIOGAS, OXIGEN, AMMONIA Rgulation laction directe balance
corrosifs: METHANE, GPL, AZOTE...
CARATTERISTICHE: FEATURES: CARACTERISTIQUES:

-Peso: 19 Kg -Weight: 19 Kg -Poids: 19 Kg
-Corpo: GS 400 -Body: GS 400 -Corps: GS 400
-Testata in alluminio pressofuso -Alluminium die casting heading. -Tete en aluminium moule sous pression
-Tenuta in gomma nitrilica NBR o HNBR -Seal nitrile rubber -Sceau en gomme nitrilique
-Membrane in tessuto gommato sandwich -Diaphragm rubberized canvas -Membranes en tissu gomm sandwich
-Temperatura : - 20 +60 C -Work temperature: -20 +60 C -Temperature: -20 +60 C
Copyright 2011 Coprim s.r.l. - www.coprimgas.it 102

PORTATE METANO RIDUTTORE ALFA 40 Natural gas flow rates
Dbit de mthane
- I valori riportati in rosso sono quelli consigliati.
Per ottenere le portate in Kg/h di GPL moltiplicare i valori riportati in rosso x 1.42.
Per gruppi di riduzione a servizio reti si pu arrivare a considerare le portate indicate in nero.
- The red indicated values are suggested.
To have LPG flow rates you must multiply the values on the tables x 1.42.
For reduction groups in networks service, the black indicated flow rates may be considered.
- Les valeurs indiques en rouge sont suggrs.
Pour obtenir les debits en Kg/h de GPL, multiplier les valeurs rapportes dans la fiche x 1.42.
Pour les groups de reduction service rseaux on peut considerer le debits indiques en noir.
Press. low pressure inlet pressure

uscita Bassa pressione BP - entrata (bar) basse pression pression dentre
-mbar-
Outlet press.
0.2 0.3 0.5 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 - 8
25 131 170 165 214 184 239 286 371 403 523 484 629 672 873 695 904 695 904
35 128 166 164 213 168 218 276 358 399 518 479 622 672 873 702 913 702 913
50 123 159 164 213 218 283 324 421 405 526 503 653 672 873 712 926 712 926
100 103 133 163 211 217 282 323 419 404 525 502 652 673 874 746 970 746 970
120 93 120 139 180 203 263 317 412 413 536 502 652 673 874 760 988 760 988
Press. medium pressure inlet pressure

uscita Media pressione MP - entrata (bar) moyenne pression pression dentre
-bar-
Outlet press.
0.3 0.5 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 - 8
0.11 146 189 207 269 319 414 414 538 502 652 673 874 753 979 753 979
0.15 129 167 197 256 315 409 412 535 502 652 673 874 780 1014 780 1014
0.20 108 140 186 241 311 404 409 531 500 650 673 874 814 1058 814 1058
0.30 158 205 300 390 404 525 497 646 672 873 841 1093 882 1146
Press. high pressure inlet pressure

uscita Alta pressione AP - entrata (bar) haute pression pression dentre
-bar-
Outlet press.
2 3 4 5 8 10 12 - 18
0.5 488 634 670 871 841 1093 1009 1311 1017 1323 1017 1323 1017 1323
1 444 577 651 846 834 1084 1008 1310 1357 1764 1357 1764 1017 1764
1.5 348 452 611 794 814 1058 998 1297 1514 1968 1696 2205 1696 2205
2 540 702 777 1010 977 1270 1513 1966 1851 2406 2035 2646
3 622 808 888 1154 1489 1935 1844 2397 2714 3528
4 696 904 1433 1862 1816 2360 2861 3719
Copyright 2011 Coprim s.r.l. - www.coprimgas.it

CONTROLLO > Elettrovalvole Serie 6 CATALOGO > Release 8.4
Elettrovalvole a comando diretto

Serie 6
2/2 vie - 3/2 vie NC e NO

Attacchi G1/8 e G3/8 - cartuccia 4
2
CONTROLLO
I corpi di queste elettrovalvole sono previsti

sia per impieghi singoli che manifold.
Questi ultimi sono previsti con gli utilizzi
filettati da G1/8 e con la cartuccia 4
incorporata (G3/8 solo per 2 vie).
Le elettrovalvole della Serie 6 sono state realizzate a 2/2 vie e a 3/2 vie nelle versioni NC
e NO.
Queste elettrovalvole sono del tipo ad otturatore ad azionamento diretto e possono
essere utilizzate indifferentemente con o senza lubrificazione.
CARATTERISTICHE GENERALI
Funzioni valvola Vie / Pos. 2/2 - 3/2 NC o NO
Costruzione ad otturatore
Materiali corpo = AL / OT
guarnizioni di tenuta = NBR (FKM su richiesta)
altri = Inox
Montaggio in qualsiasi posizione
Temperatura desercizio 0 80C (con aria secca - 20C)
Pressione desercizio vedere tabelle
Portata nominale Qn (vedere tabelle)
Diametro nominale (vedere tabelle)
Fluido aria filtrata senza lubrificazione, gas inerti.
Nel caso si utilizzasse aria lubrificata si consiglia olio ISOVG32 e di non interrompere mai la lubrificazione.
Tensione AC standard: 24V - 50/60Hz
110V - 50/60Hz
230V - 50/60Hz
DC standard: 24V
Tolleranza sulla tensione AC + 10% -15%
DC 10%
Assorbimento AC allo spunto = 19 VA, a regime = 12 VA
DC 10 W
Servizio continuo ED 100%
Grado di isolamento classe H
Connettore Mod. 124-800
Protezione IP65 con connettore DIN 43650/PG9
2/1.25.01 La ditta si riserva il diritto di variare modelli e ingombri senza preavviso.

Prodotti destinati allindustria, vietata la vendita al pubblico
327
CATALOGO > Release 8.4 CONTROLLO > Elettrovalvole Serie 6
ESEMPIO DI CODIFICA
6 3 8 M - 105 - A 6 B
6 SERIE:
3 NUMERO VIE E FUNZIONI:

0 = interfaccia
1 = 2 vie NO
2 = 2 vie NC
3 = 3 vie NC
4 = 3 vie NO
8 CONNESSIONE:
0 = interfaccia
3 = G3/8
2
8 = G1/8
C = cartuccia 4
M M = manifold
105 TIPOLOGIE CORPO:
CONTROLLO
150 = corpo filettato
450 = basetta interfaccia girevole
457 = basetta interfaccia fissa
101 = singola
102 = manifold 2 pezzi 103 = manifold 3 pezzi
A Materiale bobina:
A = PPS
6 Dimensione solenoide:
6 = 32x32
B Tensione Solenoide:
B = 24V 50/60Hz
C = 48V 50/60 Hz
D = 110V 50/60 Hz
E = 230V 50/60 Hz
2 = 12V DC
3 = 24V DC
4 = 48V DC
6 = 110V DC
La ditta si riserva il diritto di variare modelli e ingombri senza preavviso.

2/1.25.02
328
CONTROLLO > Elettrovalvole Serie 6 CATALOGO > Release 8.4
Elettrovalvole 3/2 vie NC e NO da G1/8 - Mod. 638.. e Mod. 648..
Particolarmente adatte per il comando di cilindri a semplice effetto o come valvole di segnale.
Nel mod. 648-150-A6*

(NO) le connessioni 1 e 3
vengono invertite, mentre
la pressione max di lavoro
di 6 bar nel caso venga
2
scelto un solenoide di tipo
A6B, A6C, A6D, A6E.
* = scegliere la tensione
del solenoide in base alla
tabella Esempio di codifica
CONTROLLO
pag. 2/1.25.02.
Mod. Attacchi Funzione Passaggio (mm) Qn (NI/min) Pressione min-max (bar) in DC Pressione min-max (bar) in AC Simbolo
638-150-A6* G1/8 NC 2 130 0 10 - EV03
648-150-A6* G1/8 NO 2 80 08 06 EV05
Elettrovalvole 3/2 vie NC - Mod. 638M.. e Mod. 63CM..
Elettrovalvole manifold munite dintervento manuale. Disponibili con attacchi da G1/8 allingresso e con gli
utilizzi da G1/8 oppure con cartuccia 4. Corpo consegnato completo di viti e OR.
* = scegliere la tensione
del solenoide in base alla
tabella Esempio di codifica
pag. 2/1.25.02.
Mod. Ingressi Uscite Funzione Passaggio (mm) Qn (NI/min) Pressione min-max (bar)
638M-101-A6* G1/8 G1/8 NC 2 120 0 10
63CM-101-A6* G1/8 cartuccia 4 NC 2 108 0 10
2/1.25.03 La ditta si riserva il diritto di variare modelli e ingombri senza preavviso.

329
CATALOGO > Release 8.4 CONTROLLO > Elettrovalvole Serie 6
Elettrovalvole 3/2 vie NC - Mod. 600..
Elettrovalvole munite di intervento manuale,

disponibili con due tipi di interfaccia:
A = interfaccia fissa
B = interfaccia girevole
CONTROLLO
Mod. Interfaccia Funzione Passaggio (mm) Qn (NI/min) Pressione min-max (bar) * = scegliere la tensione del
600-450-A6* girevole NC 2 106 0 10 solenoide in base alla tabella
Es. di codifica pag. 2/1.25.02.
600-457-A6* fissa NC 2 106 0 10
Elettrovalvole 2/2 vie da G3/8 - Mod. 623..
Le elettrovalvole a 2/2 vie con attacchi da G3/8

sono disponibili con diversi passaggi.
Mod. Attacchi Funzione Passaggio (mm) Qn (NI/min) Pressione min-max** (bar)

623-15E-A6* G3/8 NC 2,5 230 0 15 * = scegliere la tensione del ** = pressioni massime riferite a
623-15F-A6* G3/8 NC 3 333 0 14 solenoide in base alla tabella 50 Hz.
Es. di codifica pag. 2/1.25.02.
623-15G-A6* G3/8 NC 4 520 06
Connettore 124-800
Grado di protezione IP65

DIN 43650 (PG9)
Mod.
124-800
La ditta si riserva il diritto di variare modelli e ingombri senza preavviso.

2/1.25.04
330
DECLARATION
OF
CONFORMITY
Organizzazione con Sistema
Gestione Qualit
Certificato ISO 9001 da TV Italia srl
Nr. certif. 50 100 10767
Declaration of incorporating a partly machine

(edited under the sections of the directive 2006/42/CE Annex IIB)
TECFLAM S.r.l. in capacity as manufacturer of the partly machine:

MODEL: T 25 GM
SERIAL N: 15.16320.001
YEAR OF CONSTRUCTION: 2015
DECLARES
That such a partly machine has been manufactured to be incorporated in a machine under the sections
and to the effects of the Directive 2006/42/CE.
That it is not permissable to switch on such a partly machine until the machine into which it will be
incorporated into has been declared to conform according to the Directive 2006/42/CE.
That for such a partly machine there has been applied and respected the following essential safety
requisites and health protection of the annex 1 of the Directive 2006/42/CE: 1.1.2a, 1.1.2b, 1.1.3, 1.1.5,
1.2.1, 1.2.2, 1.2.3, 1.2.4.1, 1.2.6, 1.3.1, 1.3.2, 1.3.7, 1.3.8, 1.5.1, 1.5.2, 1.5.3, 1.5.4, 1.5.10, 1.5.11, 1.6.3,
1.6.4, 1.7.1, 1.7.1.1, 1.7.2, 1.7.3, 1.7.4, 1.7.4.1, 1.7.4.2, 1.7.4.3
That such a partly machine conforms to the following normatives and European Directives.
2006/42/CE ANNEX IIB Machine directive
EN 746-2 Equipment for industrial thermal process
2004/108/CE Directive electromagnetic compatibility
2006/95/CE Low voltage directive
That the company authorized to set up the pertinent technical documentation is:
Tecflam S.r.l. Via Curiel, 3 42025 Cavriago (RE) Italy
That the pertinent technical documentation has been compiled in conformance to the attachment VII B.
That Tecflam Srl commits to transmit, in answer to a request adequately motivated by the national
authority, informations pertaining to the subject of the partly machine of the present declaration, with
exception to the rights of intellectual property of the partly machine manufacturer. The information will be
transmitted to the national authority that has requested it.
Tecflam S.r.l.
Cavriago (RE), 25/06/15
Tecflam S.r.l. - bruciatori e macchine termiche Sede legale e amm.va: Via Curiel, 3 (Corte Tegge) 42025 Cavriago (RE) Italy
Tel. +39 0522 94.42.07 Fax +39 0522 49.40.91 e-mail: tecflam@tecflam.it / amministrazione@pec.tecflam.it web site: www.tecflam.it
WELDER APPROVAL CERTIFICATE
ACCORDING TO UNI EN ISO 9606-1:2013
No. 15VE00054PO1
Designation UNI EN ISO 9606-1 135-D T BW FM1 S t3 D90 PA ss nb
Welder FRIGIERI ANDREA
Born in SASSUOLO (MO) on 10/09/1965
Identification FRGNDR65P10I462F Method of Identification C.F. Stamp No. FA
Employed by IMPIANTI TERMO SANITARI F2F DI FRIGIERI RENZO & C. S.N.C. - SASSUOLO
(MO)
WPS used by welder during welding of test coupon: 03 Job knowledge: not tested
Welding variables Test piece Range of qualification

Welding process(es) 135-D 135; 138
Transfer mode Short-arc Short, spray, globular and pulsed-arc
Product type Pipes Plates and pipes
Type of weld BW Butt weld*
Parent Metal group (ISO/TR 15608) 1.1 1 to 11
Filler material group(s) FM1 FM1, FM2
Filler material type Solid wire Solid wire/electrode core: M
Shielding gas (EN ISO 14175) ISO 14175: M21 All compatible
Type of current and polarity DC EP All compatible
Deposited thickness (mm) 3 3 to 6
Pipe outside diameter (mm) 90 45 and over
Welding position(s) PA PA
Weld details / Layer technique ss nb ss nb, ss mb, bs, ss gb, ss fb
*Qualify also branch connections with an angle >= 60
Type of test
Visual Acceptable Radiographic Not tested Magnetic particle Not tested Penetrant Not tested
Macro Not tested Fracture Not tested Bend Acceptable
a1523F6444O874q9s71692E795P561V3
This certificate is valid until 30 January 2018
Issued at GENOVA on 30 January 2015
This certificate consist of 2 pages
Il contenuto del presente documento costituisce materiale riservato e soggetto a copyright.
RINA Services S.p.A.

Via Corsica 12 - 16128 Genova
Membro degli accordi di Mutuo riconoscimento EA e IAF

Signatory of EA and IAF Mutual Recognition Agreements
Certificate No. 15VE00054PO1 Page 2 of 2
Prolongation for approval by employer / Prolongation for approval by examiner or

coordinator for the following 6 months test body
Date Signature Position of title Date Signature Position of title
The validity of this certificate is subject to compliance with the RINA document "Rules for the Certification of Industrial Welders and Welding
Operators" in force upon release of this certificate
Form UNI 9606-1/2013

No. 15VE00054PO2
Designation UNI EN ISO 9606-1 311L T BW FM1 wm t3 D60 H-L045 ss nb
(MO)
WPS used by welder during welding of test coupon: 01 Job knowledge: not tested

Welding process(es) 311L 311 leftward
Type of weld BW Butt weld*
Filler material type With filler metal/No filler metal
Deposited thickness (mm) 3 3 to 4,5
Welding position(s) H-L045 PA, PC, PE, PF

Weld details / Layer technique ss nb ss nb, ss mb, bs, ss gb, ss fb
*Qualify also branch connections with an angle >= 60
Type of test
Macro Not tested Fracture Not tested Bend Acceptable
6O488651V65P53qRs57V626E117G122M



Form UNI 9606-1/2013

No. 15VE00054PO3
Designation UNI EN ISO 9606-1 135-D T FW FM1 S t2 D17 PB sl
(MO)
WPS used by welder during welding of test coupon: 02/13 Job knowledge: not tested

Product type Pipes Pipes
Type of weld FW Fillet weld
Material thickness (mm) 2 2 to 4
Pipe outside diameter (mm) 17 17 to34
Welding position(s) PB PA, PB

Weld details / Layer technique sl sl
Type of test
Macro Acceptable Fracture Not tested Bend Not tested
1E82e5g2i6516P96s13P32V42E3254O



Form UNI 9606-1/2013

No. 15VE00054PO4
Designation UNI EN ISO 9606-1 135-D T FW FM1 S t3 D50 PB sl
(MO)
WPS used by welder during welding of test coupon: 03/13 Job knowledge: not tested

Type of weld FW Fillet weld
Material thickness (mm) 3 >= 3
Welding position(s) PB PA, PB

Weld details / Layer technique sl sl
Type of test
Macro Acceptable Fracture Not tested Bend Not tested
66c75445O285o724E841z3bV152G13P9



Form UNI 9606-1/2013

Type Examination
No. EC-86/10/055/Rev 1
lssued to: Rubinetterie ltaliane Velatta S.p A.
Via Delle Acacie

SZona lndustriale D4
28075 Grignasco (NO)
Italy
ln respect of:
Ball Valves as listed on page 2
Samples representative of production have been tested and examined and found to comply with the Essential
Requirements as detailed in Annex I of Council Directive 2009/142lEC European Gas Appliance Directive as
transposed by the UK Statutory lnstrument 1995 No. 1629.
For and on behalf of the British Standards lnstitution, a Notified Body for the above Directive (Notified Body Number
0086):
David Ford, Director, Healthcare and Testing Services
First lssued: 11 May2010 Date:24 May2010
Page: 1 of 2
Fh^tt(t
raisi ng standards warldwide* fDilT
United Kingdom Tel: r44 (0)8450 765600 Web: \M.bsigroup.com. BSI Group Headquarters: 389 Chiswick High Road, London W4 4AL Tel: r44 (0)20 8996 9000 PSl 023v2/031 0
Type Examination
No. EC-86/10i055/Rev 1
Product ldentification number: c86CL55

Project Number: 2/35889
Gas Category For Normative

Model Designation
& Pressure lnstallation ln Reference
7130,7133, 71 34,7136,7137 ,7138,

7160,7163,7164,
7167 ,7180,7184,7187 ,
7220,7224,7227,
7 230, 7 233, 7 234, 7 236, 7 237, 7 238,
7240,7243,7244,7247,
7250,7253,7254,7257,
7 430, 7 433, 7 434, 7 436, 7 437, 7 438
AII EU
7 440, 7 443, 7 444, 7 446, 7 447, 7 448 1t', 2no and 3'd BS EN 331: 1998
Countries
7 450, 7 453, 7 454, 7 456, 7 457, 7 458
7 460, 7 463, 7 464, 7 466, 7 467, 7 468
7 47 0, 7 473, 7 47 4, 7 47 6, 7 477, 7 47 I
7 480, 7 483, 7 484, 7 486, 7 487, 7 488
7492,7494,
7 4, 7 524, 7 535, 7 564, 7 584,
51
8500, 8501, 851 0, 851 1 , 8520,
8521, 8530, 8531, 8550, 8551
Note: This revised certificate has been issued to correct model numbers 7514,7524 and7488.
Application Warning: These devices may not be suitable for all applications and it is the responsibilily of
appliance designers to select the control devices that are appropriate for their specific product design.
First lssued: 11 May2010 Dale:24 May 2010
Page:2 o 2
fr.ca)
raisi ng standards worldwide* fD-tt
United Kingdom Tel: +44 (0)8450 765600 Web: w.bsigroup.com. BSI Group Headquarters: 389 Chiswick High Road, London W4 4AL Tel; +44 (0)20 8996 9000. P5l 023v2/031 0
Viale Lombardia 20 - 20021 Bollate (MILANO) - ITALY
Tel. +39.2.383301 - Fax +39.2.3503940
CERTIFICATO CE
CE CERTIFICATE
Registrazione n. PED/0497/010/02
Registration number
lOrganismo di Certificazione CSI S.p.A. (Organismo Notificato per la Direttiva 97/23/CE)

The Certification Body CSI S.p.A. ( 97/23/EC Directive Notified Body)
certifica che
certifies that
MADAS S.r.l.
Via Moratello 5/6/7 - 37048 S.Pietro di Legnago (VR)
ha implementato, opera e mantiene un sistema qualit conforme alla
Direttiva 97/23/CE - allegato III - modulo D1
has implemented, operates and maintains a quality system in compliance to
97/23/EC Directive - annex III - module D1
allo scopo di produrre

for the scope of manufacture
FILTRO GAS FM
FM gas filter
il produttore autorizzato ad apporre sulla attrezzatura in pressione di cui sopra,

dopo la marcatura CE, il numero di identificazione dellOrganismo Notificato 0497
the manufacturer is authorized to provide the above pressure equipment, following the CE
marking, the Notified Body identification number 0497
Il Responsabile del Centro

data emissione
Managing Director
emission date
Dott. Ing. P. Cau
30/05/2002
CERTIFICATO DI ESAME DI TIPO
EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE
No. 51AR1066
Copy in conformity with the original

VISTO L'ESITO DELLE VERIFICHE CONDOTTE IN CONFORMIT ALL'ALLEGATO II, PUNTO 1,
Copia conforme all'originale

DEL DPR 15/11/96, N. 661, ATTUAZIONE DELLA DIRETTIVA 90/396/CEE,
SI DICHIARA CHE I SEGUENTI PRODOTTI (MODELLO/TIPO):
On the basis of our assessment carried out according to Annex II, section 1,
of Legislative Decree of 1996/11/15, No. 661, national transposition of the Directive 90/396/EEC,
we hereby certify that the following products (model/type):
Filtri gas
Gas filters
Modelli FMC 15, FMC 20

Models FMC 15, FMC 20
(for further information see annexes)
(ulteriori informazioni sono riportate in allegato)
COSTRUITI DA:
Manufactured by:
MADAS SRL
VIA MORATELLO 5-6-7
37048 SAN PIETRO DI LEGNAGO VR
SODDIFANO LE DISPOSIZIONI DEL DECRETO SUDDETTO.

Meet the requirements of the aforementioned national legislation.
QUESTO CERTIFICATO DI ESAME CE DI TIPO RILASCIATO DA IMQ S.P.A. QUALE

ORGANISMO NOTIFICATO PER LA DIRETTIVA 90/396/CEE.
IL NUMERO IDENTIFICATIVO DELL'IMQ S.P.A. QUALE ORGANISMO NOTIFICATO : 0051
This EC Type Examination Certificate is issued by IMQ S.p.A. as Notified Body for the Directive 90/396/EEC.
Notified Body notified to European Commission under number: 0051
2002-02-05
DATA
IL PRECEDENTE CERTIFICATO ANNULLA E SOSTITUISCE IL PRECEDENTE DEL 1996-12-13

This Certificate cancels and replaces the previous one of
Mod. 584 - 12/00 - Pes.
Il presente Certificato soggetto alle condizioni previste dall'IMQ nel "Regolamento relativo al rilascio di Certificati di esame di tipo e all'utilizzo della Marcatura CE
su apparecchi a gas e dell'attestato per i relativi dispositivi di sicurezza, in base alla Direttiva CEE90/396"
This Certificate is subjected to the conditions foreseen by IMQ "Rules concerning the issuing of EC Type Examination Certificates and the use of CE Marking on gas
appliances and the certificate for gas fittings, following the provisions of tha Directive 90/396 EEC".
No. 51AR1067


Filtri gas
Gas filters
Modelli FM 15, FM 20, FM 25

Models FM 15, FM 20, FM 25
COSTRUITI DA:
Manufactured by:
MADAS SRL
VIA MORATELLO 5-6-7


2002-02-05
DATA

Mod. 584 - 12/00 - Pes.
No. 51AR1068


Filtri gas
Gas filters
Modelli FM 32, FM 40, FM 25 M

Models FM 32, FM 40, FM 25 M
COSTRUITI DA:
Manufactured by:
MADAS SRL
VIA MORATELLO 5-6-7


2002-02-05
DATA

Mod. 584 - 12/00 - Pes.
No. 51AR1069


Filtri gas
Gas filters
Modelli FM 50
Models FM 50
COSTRUITI DA:
Manufactured by:
MADAS SRL
VIA MORATELLO 5-6-7


2002-02-05
DATA

Mod. 584 - 12/00 - Pes.
No. 51AR1070


Filtri gas
Gas filters
Modelli FM 65, FM 80
Models FM 65, FM 80
COSTRUITI DA:
Manufactured by:
MADAS SRL
VIA MORATELLO 5-6-7


2002-02-05
DATA

Mod. 584 - 12/00 - Pes.
No. 51AR1071


Filtri gas
Gas filters
Modelli FM 100
Models FM 100
COSTRUITI DA:
Manufactured by:
MADAS SRL
VIA MORATELLO 5-6-7


2002-02-05
DATA

Mod. 584 - 12/00 - Pes.
No. 51AR1072


Filtri gas
Gas filters
Modelli FM 125, FM 150
Models FM 125, FM 150
COSTRUITI DA:
Manufactured by:
MADAS SRL
VIA MORATELLO 5-6-7


2002-02-05
DATA

Mod. 584 - 12/00 - Pes.
COFI s.r.l.
Via Castagnole 58/A
31100 Treviso
Tel. 0422/432635 Fax. 0422/432802
Web site: www.cofisrl.it e-mal: cofi@cofisrl.it
DICHIARAZIONE DI CONFORMITA'
La ditta COFI srl con sede a Treviso in via Castagnole 58/a - Italy -
DICHIARA
che il trasformatore TRK2-30PVD alimentato a 220-240 V 50/60 Hz

prodotto in conformit con la norma EN 61558-2-3:2011-04 secondo quanto
prescritto dalla direttiva 2006/95/CE.
Il rispetto della norma EN 55014-1/A2 sulla compatibilit elettromagnetica, in
conformit con la direttiva 2004/108/CE, subordinato al cablaggio e al tipo di
macchina nella quale viene montato il trasformatore.
I test sono stati condotti con la distanza tra gli elettrodi di 3mm in un bruciatore
standard.
Il trasformatore marcato |
, TEST IMQ
Il trasformatore testato IMQ
Treviso, 20/09/2012
COFI srl
L'Amministratore Unico
Giancarlo Comin
86-3720-0005 Rev. B
DICHIARAZIONE
Pag. 1 di 2
DI CONFORMIT
Il sottoscritto, rappresentante il seguente costruttore
Camozzi spa
Via Eritrea, 20/I
25126 Brescia Italy
Tel: +39 030 37921
Fax: +39 030 2400464
E-mail: info@camozzi.com
http://www.camozzi.com
dichiara qui di seguito che il prodotto:
Elettrovalvole S. 6
con le versioni si solenoide elencate alla pagina seguente
risultano in conformit a quanto previsto dalla seguenti direttive comunitarie:
DIRETTIVA 2004/108/CE DEL PARLAMENTO EUROPEO E DEL CONSIGLIO

DEL 15 DICEMBRE 2004 CONCERNENTE IL RIAVVICINAMENTO DELLE
2004/108/CE LEGISLAZIONI DEGLI STATI MEMBRI RELATIVE ALLA COMPATIBILITA
ELETTROMAGNETICA E CHE ABROGA LA DIRETTIVA 89/336/CEE
e che sono state applicate tutte le norme e/o specifiche tecniche indicate a pagina 2
Brescia, 18/02/09
CAMOZZI SPA
Camozzi Giovanni
Data 1 emissione 19/05/05

86-3720-0005 Rev. B
DICHIARAZIONE
Pag. 2 di 2
DI CONFORMIT
Riferimento relativo alle norme e/o specifiche tecniche, o parti di esse, utilizzate per questa
dichiarazione di conformit:
Data di emissione Titolo

Numero di riferimento
Dispositivi elettrici automatici di comando per uso
EN 60730-1 2000 domestico e similare Parte 1: Norme generali
EN 60730-1 - A1 2004 Modifica A1:2004 alla EN 60730-1:2000
EN 60730-1 A13 2004 Modifica A13:2004 alla EN 60730-1:2000
EN 60730-1 - A12 2003 Modifica A12:2003 alla EN 60730-1:2000
EN 60730 A14 2005 Modifica A14:2005 alla EN 60730-1:2000

Dispositivi elettrici automatici di comando per uso
domestico e similare
EN 60730-2-8 2002 Parte 2: Norme particolari per le valvole idrauliche ad
azionamento elettrico,
comprese le prescrizioni meccaniche
EN 60730-2-8 A1 2003 Modifica A1:2003 alla EN 60730-2-8:2002
Versioni solenoide :
A6B
A6C
A62
A63
A64
CERTIFICATE
No. 210 10 10 2482.0042
Holderof Gertificate: ReerSpa
32viaCarcano
10153Torino
ITALY
Factory(ies):
Mark:
Certification
Product: Safety-RelatedProgrammableSystems
ModularSafetyIntegratedController
Model(s): MOSAIC
For nomenclaturesee attachment
Parameters: Ratedvoltage: 24VDC*.200/o
Operatingtemperature: -10...55"C
Storagetemperature: -20...85'C
Max.ratingrelayoutput:230VAC- 6A
Tested 2006|421EC MachineryDirective

accordingto: EN61131-2:2007
EN ISO13849-1:2008 (Cat.4,
PLe)
EN61496-1(Type4)
EN61508:1998 part1,3,4(SlL3)
EN61508-2:2000 (SlL3)
IEC61784-3:2008
EN62061:2005 (SlLCL3)
The productwas tested on a voluntarybasis and complieswith the essentialrequirements.The

certificationmark shown above can be affixedon the product.lt is not permittedto alter the
certificationmark in any way. In additionthe certificationholdermust not transferthe certificate
to third parties.See also notes overleaf.
Test reportno.: RT833577
Validuntil: 2015-11-
Date, 2010-11-15 . !q411,

Page1 of2
N
TVSDProduct GmbH. Zertifizierstelle

Service 65 . 80339
RidlerstraBe Miinchen Germany TIJV@
ATTACHMENT
to certificate
No. 210 10 10 24820042
Nomenclatureof MOSAIG
M1: masterunit
8 Digital
INPUTS
2 DigitalOUTPUTS
Mt802: l/O expansions

B Digital
INPUTS
2 DigitalOUTPUTS
Mt8: inputonlyexpansions
8 Digital
INPUTS
MH6: inputonlyexpansions
16 Digital
INPUTS
MO2: outputonlyexpansions
2 Digital.OUTPUTS
M04: outputonlyexpansions-
4 DigitalOUTPUTS
MR2: guidedcontactsafetyrelayoutputmodules
1 N.A.+2 N.C.
N.O.contacts:
MR4: guidedcontactsafetyrelayoutputmodules
2 N.A.+ 4 N.C.
N.O.contacts:
diagnostic to the mainfieldbuses:

connections
MBP(PROFIBUS),MBC(CanOpen), MBD(DeviceNet)
Depament: TR-RA/MUC
Date: 2010-11-15
Page2 of 2
N
TVSDProduct GmbH' Zertifizierstelle

Service 65 ' 80339
RidlerstraBe Mnchen Germanv TITV@

T 25 GM 15.16320.001 (1-2) Ing

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

T 25 GM 15.16320.001 (1-2) Ing

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INSTRUCTION - USE - ASSEMBLY

MAINTENANCE AND SPARE PART HANDBOOK

BURNER SERIES: T...G ../.. (GAS)

E. Starting-up and regulation

- total accessibility to all internal and external organs

COMBUSTIBLE DIESEL OIL/OIL

LENGTH OF FLAME (m)

DIAMETER OF FLAME (m)

Pressure in combustion chamber

The control panel (if supplied separately) can be handled manually.

These must be made by specialised personnel (*).

This must be carried out by qualified personnel authorised by TECFLAM S.r.l.

GAS OPERATION (MODULATING)

- It is normal for it to block with the first start-up

Deflector disk / diffuser

Combustion air pressure switch

B) HEAD WITH DEFLECTOR/NOZZLE

Regulating the pilot flame

Pressure in combustion chamber

Pressure in combustion chamber

Pressure in combustion chamber

Pressure in combustion chamber

WORKING CURVES T 120

i) MOVING PARTS AND MECHANICAL RISKS

ii) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGES

iii) RISK OF BURNS

FAULT PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

Check for any intervention of the

Safely block activated. Press the release/reset button

Motor fault. Replace the motor.

Check the gas pressure.

Programmer fault Replace

Transformer fault Replace

Adjust the distance between the elec-

Programmer fault. Replace the programmer.

TRANSPORT AND INSTALLATION 9

MAIN COMPONENTS TECHNICAL CARDS 16

E. Start up and adjustment

F. Protection against accidents

Warranty is provided according to the agreement clauses. Original TECFLAM spare

We represent hereunder an example of used gas train valves:

1 Fuel on-off valve.

5 Maximum gas pressure switch.

6 Minimum gas pressure switch.

7 Valve leakage control pressure switch.

8 Fuel solenoid valve unit.

9 0-250 mbar pressure gauge.

10 0-50 mbar pressure gauge.

13 On-off valve of the pilot burner line.

14 Pressure stabilizer of the pilot burner line.

15 Safety solenoid valve of the pilot burner.

16 Adjustment solenoid valve of the pilot burner.

- The gas train valves weight allows it to be handled manually.

Gas on-off tap

Pressure reducer (present if necessary)

Gas solenoid valves

Motor-driven butterfly valve

Good maintenance requires inspection of all machine components at regular intervals,

- Modifications must not be made to the equipment to alter its performance.

- Intervention on the gas train valves by unskilled personnel is strictly prohibited.

2 020026 BURNER T 25 GM POT. 2470 kW - 253 NM3/H NR 1,00

SERIAL NUMBER 15.16320.001,

1 AZ010 ACTUATOR SKP15.000E2 1STAGE SIEMENS NR 1,0000